TW201811283A - Surface sheet for absorbent article - Google Patents

Surface sheet for absorbent article Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW201811283A
TW201811283A TW106126840A TW106126840A TW201811283A TW 201811283 A TW201811283 A TW 201811283A TW 106126840 A TW106126840 A TW 106126840A TW 106126840 A TW106126840 A TW 106126840A TW 201811283 A TW201811283 A TW 201811283A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
convex portion
fiber layer
surface sheet
fiber
absorbent article
Prior art date
Application number
TW106126840A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI648041B (en
Inventor
長島啓介
松井学
諸田真由子
Original Assignee
日商花王股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商花王股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商花王股份有限公司
Publication of TW201811283A publication Critical patent/TW201811283A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI648041B publication Critical patent/TWI648041B/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/51—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
    • A61F13/511—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/51—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
    • A61F13/511—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin
    • A61F13/513—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin characterised by its function or properties, e.g. stretchability, breathability, rewet, visual effect; having areas of different permeability
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
    • A61L15/00—Chemical aspects of, or use of materials for, bandages, dressings or absorbent pads
    • A61L15/16—Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids such as urine or blood, e.g. sanitary towels, tampons
    • A61L15/20—Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids such as urine or blood, e.g. sanitary towels, tampons containing organic materials
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
    • A61L15/00—Chemical aspects of, or use of materials for, bandages, dressings or absorbent pads
    • A61L15/16—Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids such as urine or blood, e.g. sanitary towels, tampons
    • A61L15/22—Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids such as urine or blood, e.g. sanitary towels, tampons containing macromolecular materials
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
    • A61L15/00—Chemical aspects of, or use of materials for, bandages, dressings or absorbent pads
    • A61L15/16—Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids such as urine or blood, e.g. sanitary towels, tampons
    • A61L15/42—Use of materials characterised by their function or physical properties
    • A61L15/48—Surfactants

Abstract

This surface sheet (1) for absorbent article comprises a first fiber layer (11) and a second fiber layer (12). The surface sheet (1) is used in such a manner that the first fiber layer (11) is positioned toward a wearer's skin contact surface side. The first fiber layer (11) further comprises high convex parts (1b) and low convex parts (1s) which protrude from the second fiber layer(12)-side toward the first fiber layer(11)-side. The interior parts of the high convex parts (1b) and the low convex parts (1s) are filled with a fiber which configures the first fiber layer (11). With the high convex parts (1b) seen in cross-section view in a thickness direction Z, the hydrophilicity of high convex part apex parts (1bu) on an apex part(1bt)-side in the first fiber layer (11) is greater than the hydrophilicity of high convex part bottom parts (1bd) on the second fiber layer(12)-side in the first fiber layer (11), and the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer (12) is greater than the hydrophilicity of the high convex part apex parts (1bu).

Description

吸收性物品用之表面片材Surface sheet for absorbent articles

本發明係關於一種吸收性物品用之表面片材。The present invention relates to a surface sheet for an absorbent article.

本案申請人先前提出有一種吸收性物品用之表面片材，其具有第1纖維層及積層於其之第2纖維層，且具備朝向該第1纖維層側突出之複數個凸部；對該凸部於其厚度方向假想性地剖面觀察時，於第1纖維層之上側與第1纖維層之下側親水度不同，且第2纖維層之親水度高於第1纖維層之親水度(專利文獻1)。 除此之外，本案申請人先前提出有一種吸收性物品用之表面片材，其具有由複數個壓紋部所包圍之大多邊形區域及小多邊形區域，且該壓紋部構成該大多邊形區域及該小多邊形區域之頂部；於各該大多邊形區域內配置有高凸部，於各該小多邊形區域內配置有低凸部(專利文獻2)。 先前技術文獻 專利文獻 專利文獻1：日本專利第5809341號公報 專利文獻2：日本專利特開2015-186543號公報The applicant of this case has previously proposed a surface sheet for an absorbent article, which has a first fiber layer and a second fiber layer laminated thereon, and has a plurality of convex portions protruding toward the first fiber layer side; When the convex portion is viewed in an imaginary cross-section in the thickness direction, the hydrophilicity is different between the upper side of the first fiber layer and the lower side of the first fiber layer, and the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer is higher than that of the first fiber layer Patent Document 1). In addition, the applicant of the present case previously proposed a surface sheet for an absorbent article, which has a large polygonal region and a small polygonal region surrounded by a plurality of embossed portions, and the embossed portions constitute the large polygonal region And the top of the small polygon area; a high convex portion is disposed in each of the large polygon areas; and a low convex portion is disposed in each of the small polygon areas (Patent Document 2). Prior Art Literature Patent Literature Patent Literature 1: Japanese Patent No. 5809341 Patent Literature 2: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-186543

本發明係一種吸收性物品用之表面片材，其具有第1纖維層及積層於其之第2纖維層，且該第1纖維層位於穿著者之肌膚抵接面側。上述第1纖維層具有自上述第2纖維層側朝向該第1纖維層側突出之複數個高凸部、及高度低於該高凸部之複數個低凸部。該高凸部及該低凸部之內部被構成該第1纖維層之纖維填滿，對上述高凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之高凸部頂部之親水度高於該第1纖維層中之上述第2纖維層側之高凸部底部之親水度，且上述第2纖維層之親水度高於該高凸部頂部之親水度。The present invention is a surface sheet for an absorbent article, which has a first fiber layer and a second fiber layer laminated thereon, and the first fiber layer is located on the skin abutting surface side of the wearer. The first fiber layer includes a plurality of high convex portions protruding from the second fiber layer side toward the first fiber layer side, and a plurality of low convex portions having a height lower than the high convex portion. The inside of the high convex portion and the low convex portion are filled with the fibers constituting the first fiber layer. When the high convex portion is sectioned in the thickness direction through the top thereof, the The hydrophilicity at the top of the high convex portion on the top side is higher than the hydrophilicity at the bottom of the high convex portion on the second fiber layer side in the first fiber layer, and the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer is higher than the top of the high convex portion Of hydrophilicity.

根據專利文獻1所記載之表面片材，表面不易殘留液體，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面，因此使用感提昇。但是，需要一種表面片材，其進一步減少與穿著者之肌膚之接觸面積，並且表面不易殘留液體，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面。又，專利文獻1中關於具備2種凸部未作任何記載。又，關於著眼於2種凸部中容易接觸穿著者之肌膚之高凸部時之親水度梯度，亦未作任何記載與提示。 又，根據專利文獻2所記載之表面片材，可進一步減少與穿著者之肌膚之接觸面積，並且進一步減輕黏膩感或悶濕感，使用感提昇。但是，專利文獻2中關於表面之液體殘留性未作任何記載。又，專利文獻2中關於著眼於2種凸部中容易接觸穿著者之肌膚之高凸部時之親水度梯度亦未作任何記載與提示。 因此，本發明係關於一種可解決上述先前技術存在之缺點之吸收性物品用之表面片材。 以下，對本發明之吸收性物品用之表面片材基於其較佳之實施形態之表面片材1(以下亦稱為表面片材1)，一面參照圖式一面進行說明。 如圖1～圖3所示，本實施形態之表面片材1係具有第1纖維層11及積層於其之第2纖維層12的多層構造之積層不織布。表面片材1係以第1纖維層11位於穿著者之肌膚抵接面側之方式使用者。圖中之X方向為第2方向，且係與機械方向(MD(machine direction)方向)及衛生棉10之縱向相同之方向。又，圖中之Y方向為與第2方向正交之第1方向，且係與正交於機械方向(MD方向)之方向(CD方向(cross direction，交叉方向))及衛生棉10之橫向相同之方向。又，圖中之Z方向為厚度方向。再者，衛生棉10之縱向係穿著時與穿著者之前後方向對應之方向。 圖1、圖2表示使用表面片材1之經期衛生棉10。經期衛生棉10(以下亦稱為衛生棉10)具備配置於肌膚抵接面側之表面片材1、配置於非肌膚抵接面側之背面片材2、及配置於該等兩片材1、2間之縱向X上較長之吸收體3。又，衛生棉10於沿縱向X之兩側部10s、10s配置有一對側部片材4、4，形成有朝橫向Y外側延出之一對側翼部5、5。如圖1所示，衛生棉10係相對於沿縱向X延伸之中心線CL左右對稱地形成。 再者，於本說明書中，所謂「肌膚抵接面」係指構成衛生棉10之表面片材1等各構件之正背兩面中穿著時配置於穿著者之肌膚側之面，所謂「非肌膚抵接面」係指表面片材1等各構件之正背兩面中穿著時朝向穿著者之肌膚側之相反側之面。 若對衛生棉10進行詳細敍述，則如圖1所示，衛生棉10被劃分為：中央部A，其係配置側翼部5、5之區域；前方部B，其於穿著經期衛生棉10時配置於較中央部A靠穿著者之腹側；及後方部C，其於穿著衛生棉10時配置於較中央部A靠穿著者之背部側。穿著衛生棉10時，通常中央部A包含與穿著者之排泄部(陰道口等)對向配置之部分。換言之，側翼部5形成於衛生棉10之包含排泄對向區域(與穿著者之排泄部對向之區域)之縱向之區域。 如圖2所示，表面片材1及背面片材2分別覆蓋吸收體3之肌膚抵接面側之整面及非肌膚抵接面側之整面，具有自吸收體3之周緣延出之延出部分。如圖2所示，表面片材1之橫向Y之長度較背面片材2之橫向Y之長度短。如圖1、圖2所示，一對側部片材4、4分別於表面片材1之肌膚抵接面側上跨及表面片材1之沿縱向X之側部全域地配設固定，具有自表面片材1之側部向橫向Y之外側延出之延出部分。於衛生棉10中，背面片材2之橫向Y外側之延出部分與側部片材4之橫向Y外側之延出部分藉由接著、熔合等而被固定，於中央部A較前方部B及後方部C大幅地向橫向Y外側延出而形成側翼部5。於衛生棉10之背面片材2之橫向Y中央部及側翼部5之背面片材2之延伸部之非肌膚抵接面上分別塗佈黏著劑而形成有用以將衛生棉10固定於短褲等內褲之固定部5a。再者，各側部片材4亦可於其橫向Y內側側(中心線CL側)之端部附近配設固定在縱向X上伸長之狀態之彈性構件，形成於穿著時藉由該彈性構件之收縮力而使距離上述端部特定寬度之部分與表面片材1相隔之防漏翻邊。 又，於衛生棉10中對表面片材1及吸收體3進行壓紋加工而一體地壓縮而成之弧狀之壓縮槽(未圖示)可於縱向X上延伸而自前方部B跨及後方部C地延伸。例如，壓縮槽(未圖示)較佳為形成為與衛生棉10之前方部B、兩側部10s、10s及後方部C相連之一條弧狀。壓縮槽(未圖示)係藉由伴隨或不伴隨熱地將表面片材1及吸收體3自肌膚抵接面側進行壓縮而形成。 作為構成上述衛生棉10之背面片材2、吸收體3及側部片材4，可分別無特別限制地使用與該技術領域中先前使用者相同者。例如作為背面片材2，可使用合成樹脂製之液體不透過性膜、或紡黏-熔噴-紡黏積層不織布等耐水壓較高之撥水性不織布。作為吸收體3，可使用利用衛生紙將包含吸收性聚合物之粒子及纖維材料之吸收芯體被覆而成者。作為側部片材4，可使用耐水壓較高之撥水性不織布，例如可使用紡黏-熔噴-紡黏積層不織布等。 表面片材1、背面片材2、吸收體3及側部片材4之固定可使用通常用於經期衛生棉等吸收性物品之接著劑或熱壓紋、超音波壓紋、高頻壓紋等熔合方法。 構成上述衛生棉10之一實施形態之表面片材1亦可設為熱風不織布以外之不織布，但就可同時進行後述之熱收縮步驟與使纖維網熱熔合而形成為不織布之步驟而言，較佳為熱風不織布。 所謂「熱風不織布」係指經過將50℃以上之流體、例如氣體或水蒸汽吹送至纖維網或不織布之步驟而製造之不織布，其含義不僅包括僅由本步驟所製造之不織布，而且亦包括對由其他方法製作之不織布附加本步驟而製造之不織布或於本步驟之後進行任一步驟而製造之不織布。又，本發明之積層不織布不僅包括熱風不織布，而且亦包括將熱風不織布與其他不織布等纖維片材或膜材複合化而成者。 於作為積層不織布之表面片材1中，如圖3所示，第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12鄰接且直接接觸，於兩層11、12間未介隔其他層。第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12係根據構成該等層之纖維之材料之種類、纖維之粗度、親水化處理之有無、層之形成方法等因素而加以區分。若利用光學顯微鏡(Keyence股份有限公司製造，VHX-1000 數位顯微鏡)將表面片材1之厚度方向剖面放大，則基於該等因素，可對兩層11、12之邊界部分進行觀察。於衛生棉10中，表面片材1係將第1纖維層11配置於肌膚抵接面側，將第2纖維層12配置於非肌膚抵接面側而使用。即，衛生棉10於表面片材1之第2纖維層12側具備吸收體3。 於表面片材1中，如圖3所示，第1纖維層11具有自第2纖維層12側朝向第1纖維層11側突出之複數個高凸部1b、及高度低於高凸部1b之複數個低凸部1s。較佳為如圖4所示，表面片材1具有複數個高凸部1b、複數個低凸部1s、以及跨及高凸部1b及低凸部1s而連續地延伸之連結凸部1c。連結凸部1c係第1纖維層11自第2纖維層12側朝向第1纖維層11側低於低凸部1s地隆起而形成。高凸部1b及低凸部1s之內部被構成第1纖維層11之纖維填滿。而且，連結凸部1c之內部亦被構成第1纖維層11之纖維填滿。 於表面片材1中，第1纖維層11及第2纖維層12均為包含無規地沈積之纖維之纖維層，並非包含進一步細分化之複數層積層體者。 於表面片材1中，第2纖維層12係包含經熱收縮之熱收縮性纖維之熱收縮纖維層。另一方面，於表面片材1中，第1纖維層11積層於第2纖維層12，係包含非熱收縮性纖維之非熱收縮纖維層。表面片材1具備複數個將第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12熔接之熔接部6。較佳為如圖3、圖4所示，表面片材1係藉由規則地配置之複數個熔接部6將第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12局部地接合而貼合，將非肌膚抵接面側之第2纖維層12之熱收縮性纖維進行熱收縮而形成。於表面片材1，形成有藉由自第1纖維層11之肌膚抵接面側實施壓紋加工之熔接部6而凹陷之複數個凹部，且於未實施壓紋加工之非壓紋加工部分形成有複數個凸部。藉由熔接部6而成為凹部之部分之纖維密度變得高於未經熔接之凸部之部分，於表面片材1中變得最高。 熔接部6係藉由例如熱壓紋、超音波壓紋等各種熔合方法而形成。 表面片材1具有複數個由複數個熔接部6所包圍之大多邊形區域BT，熔接部6構成大多邊形區域BT之頂點部。又，表面片材1具有複數個由複數個構成大多邊形區域BT之頂點部之熔接部6所包圍且面積小於大多邊形區域BT的小多邊形區域ST，熔接部6亦構成小多邊形區域ST之頂點部。如此，表面片材1中形成由複數個熔接部6所包圍之多邊形區域(大多邊形區域BT，小多邊形區域ST)，且該多邊形區域(大多邊形區域BT，小多邊形區域ST)內成為非壓紋加工部。較佳為如圖4、圖5所示，多邊形區域具有將複數個熔接部6作為頂點部且由該等所包圍之複數個面積相對較大之大多邊形區域BT、及將構成鄰接之複數個大多邊形區域BT之頂點部的熔接部6作為共用頂點部而包圍且面積小於大多邊形區域BT之複數個小多邊形區域ST。如此，大多邊形區域BT與鄰接於其之小多邊形區域ST係將熔接部6作為共用頂點部。再者，本說明書中，所謂「將熔接部6作為頂點部」、或「熔接部6構成頂點」，並非將熔接部6整體作為頂點之限定含義，其含義亦包括將熔接部6之一部分作為頂點之情形。本實施形態之表面片材1中，熔接部6之一部分成為各多邊形區域之頂點，熔接部6之除頂點以外之剩餘部分成為構成各多邊形區域之外形之邊之一部分。又，「由熔接部6所包圍」之表達並非意指由熔接部6之內側所構成之區域，而指包含熔接部6之區域。 若詳細敍述，於表面片材1中，如圖4、圖5所示，大多邊形區域BT係由構成頂點部之6個熔接部6包圍，外形成為六邊形狀。另一方面，小多邊形區域ST係由構成頂點部之4個熔接部6包圍，外形成為四邊形狀。而且，關於第1方向，相鄰之2個大多邊形區域BT、BT彼此共有構成各大多邊形區域BT之6個熔接部6內之2個熔接部6(2個後述之其他接合部62)，且由連結該2個熔接部6(2個後述之其他接合部62)之邊相互區分。又，關於第2方向，相鄰之2個大多邊形區域BT、BT彼此共有構成各大多邊形區域BT之6個熔接部6內之1個熔接部6(後述之中間接合部61)，且由該1個熔接部6(後述之中間接合部61)相互劃分。又，1個四邊形之小多邊形區域ST分別由4個六邊形之大多邊形區域BT包圍。相鄰之小多邊形區域ST與各大多邊形區域BT共有6個熔接部6內之2個熔接部6(後述之中間接合部61及後述之其接合部62)，且由該2個熔接部6(後述之中間接合部61及後述之其他接合部62)相互劃分。因此，於表面片材1中，構成小多邊形區域ST之4個熔接部6全部與構成鄰接於該小多邊形區域ST之4個大多邊形區域BT之熔接部6共有。 於表面片材1中，如圖4、圖5所示，形成有複數個大多邊形區域BT沿第1方向相互鄰接地配置而構成之大多邊形區域行BTL。又，於表面片材1中，形成有複數個小多邊形區域ST沿第1方向相互鄰接地配置而構成之小多邊形區域行STL。而且，大多邊形區域行BTL與小多邊形區域行STL於與第1方向正交之第2方向上交替地配置。即，沿第2方向交替地配置有大多邊形區域行BTL、小多邊形區域行STL、大多邊形區域行BTL、・・・。又，於衛生棉10中，大多邊形行BTL及小多邊形行STL分別於衛生棉10之橫向上延伸，且於衛生棉10之縱向上交替地排列。 於表面片材1中，如圖5、圖6所示，於各大多邊形區域BT內形成有高度相對較高之高凸部1b。又，於表面片材1中，高凸部1b沿第1方向配置複數個而構成高凸部行1bL。另一方面，於各小多邊形區域ST內形成有高度低於高凸部1b之低凸部1s。又，於表面片材1中，低凸部1s沿第1方向配置複數個而構成低凸部行1sL。而且，高凸部行1bL與低凸部行1sL於與第1方向正交之第2方向上交替地配置。即，沿第2方向交替地配置有高凸部行1bL、低凸部行1sL、高凸部行1bL、・・・。而且，高凸部行1bL之高凸部1b與低凸部行1sL之低凸部1s於表面片材1上呈錯位狀配置。換言之，高凸部1b與低凸部1s朝向相對於第1方向及第2方向各者傾斜之方向而交替地排列。若將此種構成之表面片材1用於吸收性物品之一例之衛生棉10，則低於高凸部1b之低凸部1s之頂部1st於使用中不易接觸穿著者之肌膚，可減少與穿著者之肌膚之接觸面積。而且，使用中所排泄之液體容易向接觸穿著者之肌膚之高凸部1b之頂部1bt轉移，不易於表面殘留液體，使用感提昇。 於衛生棉10中，1個小多邊形行STL內相鄰之小多邊形區域ST、ST間之距離短於位於縱向X上最接近之位置之小多邊形區域ST、ST間之距離。因此，體液較沿橫向Y更容易沿縱向X擴散，易於抑制體液自衛生棉10之橫向Y之兩側部10s、10s漏出。又，於衛生棉10中，1個大多邊形行BTL內相鄰之大多邊形區域BT、BT間之距離短於位於縱向X上最接近之位置之大多邊形區域BT、BT間之距離。因此，高凸部1b不易朝向橫向Y傾斜，易於進一步抑制自衛生棉10之橫向Y之兩側部10s、10s之體液洩漏。再者，此處所謂各多邊形區域間之距離係指各多邊形區域之中心點間之距離。 於表面片材1中，如圖4，圖5所示，熔接部6於位於第2方向上最接近之位置之2個高凸部1b、1b彼此之間且位於第1方向上最接近之位置之2個低凸部1s、1s彼此之間具有中間接合部61。具體而言，於第2方向上構成最接近之高凸部行1bL、1bL之各高凸部中最接近之2個高凸部1b、1b彼此之間，且構成位於該第2方向上最接近之高凸部行1bL、1bL之間之低凸部行1sL的第1方向上最接近之2個低凸部1s、1s彼此之間，具有1個中間接合部61。於表面片材1中，複數個熔接部6包含2種形狀之接合部，第1種為中間接合部61，第2種為除中間接合部61以外之剩餘之其他接合部62。再者，本說明書中，所謂「1個接合部」係指外形上視為1個之壓紋加工部之形狀，即便該壓紋加工部之形狀包含複數個點或虛線，亦稱為「1個接合部」。 於表面片材1中，如圖4，圖5所示，各中間接合部61於第1方向上相鄰之四邊形之小多邊形區域ST、ST作為構成各小多邊形區域ST之4個熔接部6內之1個熔接部6而共有，於第2方向上相鄰之六邊形之大多邊形區域BT、BT作為構成各多邊形區域BT之6個熔接部6內之1個熔接部6而共有。因此，各中間接合部61配置於第1方向上最接近之2個低凸部1s、1s彼此之中間位置，且配置於第2方向上最接近之2個高凸部1b、1b彼此之中間位置。 於表面片材1中，如圖7所示，各中間接合部61具備雙向延出形狀部61a，該雙向延出形狀部61a係自構成位於第2方向上最接近之位置之2個大多邊形區域BT之頂點的頂點部之中心點沿形成各大多邊形區域BT之外形之邊延伸。如上所述，於表面片材1中，第2方向上相鄰之大多邊形區域BT、BT共有1個頂點部。而且，於表面片材1中，四邊形之各小多邊形區域ST之頂點部全部與鄰接於該小多邊形區域ST之六邊形之大多邊形區域BT之頂點部共有。因此，第2方向上相鄰之雙向延出形狀部61a、61a彼此相接，形成為四向延出形狀即X字形狀，即，中間接合部61自頂點沿形成第2方向上相鄰之一六邊形之大多邊形區域BT之外形之邊延伸，並且自該頂點沿形成第2方向上相鄰之另一六邊形之大多邊形區域BT之外形之邊延伸。X字形狀之中間接合部61於俯視下為4根突出部61e自頂點延出之形狀。該4根突出部61e分別為相同之長度，X字形狀之中間接合部61成為相對於通過其中心點之與第1方向平行之線及通過其中心點之與第2方向平行之線各者呈線對稱之形狀。 於表面片材1中，如圖7所示，關於X字形狀之中間接合部61之第2方向上之突出部61e彼此之交叉角度θ1，就減小表面片材1之與肌膚之接觸面積，保持良好之肌膚觸感，且使外觀印象良好之觀點而言，較佳為50°以上，尤佳為70°以上，且較佳為170°以下，尤佳為130°以下，更具體而言，較佳為50°以上且170°以下，進而較佳為70°以上且130°以下。再者，於表面片材1中，交叉角度θ1為90°。 於表面片材1中，如圖7所示，各其他接合部62於共有1個頂點之小多邊形區域ST及第1方向上相鄰之2個大多邊形區域BT、BT形成為三向延出形狀即Y字形狀，即，自作為該接合部之中心點之頂點沿形成四邊形之小多邊形區域ST之外形之一部分並且形成一六邊形之大多邊形區域BT之外形之一部分之邊延伸，且自作為該頂點部之中心點之頂點沿形成四邊形之小多邊形區域ST之外形之一部分並且形成另一六邊形之大多邊形區域BT之外形之一部分之邊延伸，且沿形成一六邊形之大多邊形區域BT之外形之一部分並且形成另一六邊形之大多邊形區域BT之外形之一部分之邊延伸。Y字形狀之其他接合部62於俯視下為3根突出部62e自作為中心點之頂點延出之形狀。該3根突出部62e分別為相同之長度，Y字形狀之其他接合部62成為相對於通過其中心點之與第2方向平行之線呈線對稱之形狀。 於表面片材1中，如圖7所示，關於Y字形狀之其他接合部62之突出部62e彼此之交叉角度θ2，就減小表面片材1之與肌膚之接觸面積及保持良好之肌膚觸感，且使外觀印象良好之觀點而言，較佳為50°以上，尤佳為70°以上，且較佳為170°以下，尤佳為130°以下，更具體而言，較佳為50°以上且170°以下，進而較佳為70°以上且130°以下。再者，於表面片材1中，交叉角度θ2為130°。 於表面片材1中，如圖7所示，關於X字形狀之中間接合部61之4根突出部61e及Y字形狀之其他接合部62之3根突出部62e各者之長度，就提高表面片材1之液體之引入性及擴散性，且情緒性之觀點而言，較佳為0.5 mm以上，進而較佳為0.7 mm以上，且較佳為5.0 mm以下，進而較佳為4.0 mm以下，更具體而言，較佳為0.5 mm以上且5.0 mm以下，進而較佳為0.7 mm以上且4.0 mm以下。再者，中間接合部61之4根突出部61e於表面片材1中自作為頂點部之中心點之頂點起之長度成為相互相同之長度。另一方面，其他接合部62之3根突出部62e於表面片材1中自頂點(頂點部之中心點)起之長度成為相互相同之長度。但是，並不限定於該形態，亦可長度不同。例如，亦可其他接合部62之3根突出部62e中之2根為相同之長度且1根之長度短於另外2根。再者，其他接合部62之3根突出部62e內之1根突出部62e於表面片材1中與第2方向(X方向)平行地配置。 於表面片材1中，如圖7所示，關於各熔接部6(中間接合部61及其他接合部62)，就維持良好之肌膚觸感並且提高表面片材1之液體之引入性及擴散性之觀點而言，1個熔接部6(中間接合部61及其他接合部62之平均)之面積較佳為1 mm2 以上，進而較佳為1.5 mm2 以上，且較佳為15 mm2 以下，進而較佳為12 mm2 以下，更具體而言，較佳為1 mm2 以上且15 mm2 以下，進而較佳為1.5 mm2 以上且12 mm2 以下。 於表面片材1中，如圖5所示，各熔接部6(中間接合部61及其他接合部62)於第1方向及第2方向上規則地分別隔開間隔而個別獨立地設置。關於各熔接部6(中間接合部61及其他接合部62)，就提高表面片材1之液體之引入性及擴散性且保持良好之肌膚觸感之觀點而言，其密度較佳為1個/cm2 以上，進而較佳為2個/cm2 以上，且較佳為32個/cm2 以下，進而較佳為16個/cm2 以下，更具體而言，較佳為1個/cm2 以上且32個/cm2 以下，進而較佳為2個/cm2 以上且16個/cm2 以下。 於表面片材1中，如圖5所示，關於位於第1方向上最接近之位置之熔接部6(中間接合部61及其他接合部62)彼此之間隔，就提高表面片材1之液體之引入性及擴散性，且良好地保持外觀之印象及肌膚觸感之觀點而言，較佳為0.5 mm以上，進而較佳為1.0 mm以上，且較佳為5.0 mm以下，進而較佳為4.0 mm以下，更具體而言，較佳為0.5 mm以上且5.0 mm以下，進而較佳為1.0 mm以上且4.0 mm以下。 於表面片材1中，如圖7所示，1個六邊形之大多邊形區域BT係由2個中間接合部61及4個其他接合部62所形成。2個中間接合部61於俯視下配置於通過大多邊形區域BT之重心之與第2方向平行地延伸之假想二等分線Ly1上，且以相對於通過大多邊形區域BT之重心之與第1方向平行地延伸之假想二等分線Lx1成為對稱之方式配置。4個其他接合部62配置於配置有2個中間接合部61之頂點部以外之大多邊形區域BT之頂點部。第1方向上最接近之2個其他接合部62、62彼此於俯視下以相對於與第2方向平行地延伸之假想二等分線Ly1成為對稱之方式配置。而且，第2方向上最接近之2個其他接合部62、62彼此於俯視下以相對於與第1方向平行地延伸之假想二等分線Lx1成為對稱之方式配置。如此，構成1個六邊形之大多邊形區域BT之X方向上最接近之2個其他接合部62、62彼此以相對於假想二等分線Lx1成為相互反向之方式配置。 於表面片材1中，如圖8所示，1個四邊形之小多邊形區域ST係由2個中間接合部61及2個其他接合部62所形成。2個中間接合部61於俯視下配置於通過小多邊形區域ST之重心之與第1方向平行地延伸之假想二等分線Lx2上，且以相對於通過小多邊形區域ST之重心之與第2方向平行地延伸之假想二等分線Ly2成為對稱之方式配置。2個其他接合部62於俯視下配置於與第2方向平行地延伸之假想二等分線Ly2上，且以相對於與第1方向平行地延伸之假想二等分線Lx2成為對稱之方式配置。如此，構成1個四邊形之小多邊形區域ST之X方向上最接近之2個其他接合部62、62彼此以相對於假想二等分線Lx2成為相互反向之方式配置成Y字形狀及倒Y字形狀。 如上所述，於表面片材1中，如圖4、圖5所示，四邊形之各小多邊形區域ST之頂點部全部與鄰接於該小多邊形區域ST之六邊形之大多邊形區域BT之頂點部共有。因此，於第2方向上，於Y字形狀之其他接合部62於第1方向上等間隔地配置而成之Y字形狀之其他接合部62之行與倒Y字形狀之其他接合部62於第1方向上等間隔地配置而成之倒Y字形狀之其他接合部62之行之間，配置有X字形狀之中間接合部61於第1方向上等間隔地配置而成之中間接合部61之行。此種包含3個接合部行之排列於第2方向上等間隔地配置。而且，於第1方向上，於與第1方向上最接近之2個Y字形狀之其他接合部62、62彼此之中間對應之位置，配置有X字形狀之中間接合部61。於第2方向上，第2方向上相鄰之Y字形狀之其他接合部62與倒Y字形狀之其他接合部62配置於與第2方向平行地延伸之假想線上。 於表面片材1中，如圖3所示，熔接部6(中間接合部61及其他接合部62)之表面片材1之構成纖維被壓密化，與未經壓紋加工之部分相比，表面片材1之高度(厚度)變得最低(薄)。即，由熔接部6(中間接合部61及其他接合部62)所形成之凹部之纖維密度較未經壓紋加工之部分變高，於表面片材1中變得最高。又，根據壓紋加工條件，亦有構成纖維熔融固化而成為膜之情況。由此，熔接部6(中間接合部61及其他接合部62)對表面片材1之硬度或排泄液之引入性產生影響。就該觀點而言，熔接部6之面積相對於表面片材總面積之比率、即壓紋化率較佳為5%以上且30%以下，尤佳為7%以上且20%以下。根據表面片材1之壓紋圖案，即便設為此種較低之壓紋化率，亦可降低與穿著者之肌膚之接觸面積。 於以如上方式形成之表面片材1中，如圖5所示，形成於六邊形之大多邊形區域BT內之高凸部1b之平面形狀為橢圓之凸部，形成於四邊形之各小多邊形區域ST內之低凸部1s之平面形狀成為圓形之凸部。又，於形成於大多邊形區域BT內之高凸部1b與形成於鄰接於大多邊形區域BT之四個小多邊形區域ST內之低凸部1s各者之間形成有連結凸部1c。 於表面片材1中，如上所述，如圖4所示，1個四邊形之小多邊形區域ST分別由4個六邊形之大多邊形區域BT包圍。於著眼於1個四邊形狀之小多邊形區域ST內之低凸部1s時，鄰接有4個六邊形狀之大多邊形區域BT內之高凸部1b。而且，如圖5所示，相互鄰接之1個小多邊形區域ST內之低凸部1s與4個大多邊形區域BT內之高凸部1b係以連結凸部1c相連，該連結凸部1c配置於構成多邊形區域之頂點部之熔接部6、6彼此之間，具體而言配置於中間接合部61與其他接合部62之間。而且，連結凸部1c之內部成為液體自高凸部1b朝向低凸部1s移動之通液路徑R。若將此種構成之表面片材1用於吸收性物品之一例之衛生棉10，則即便引入至高凸部1b內部之液體大量，亦容易發揮經由作為通液路徑R之連結凸部1c引入至低凸部1s內之作用，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面，使用感提昇。 於表面片材1中，關於高凸部1b之厚度方向(Z方向)之頂點之高度hb(參照圖9)，就提高表面片材1之良好之肌膚觸感，且強化纖維之密度梯度而提昇液體之引入性之觀點而言，較佳為1.0 mm以上，進而較佳為1.5 mm以上，且較佳為7.0 mm以下，進而較佳為5.0 mm以下，更具體而言，較佳為1.0 mm以上且7.0 mm以下，進而較佳為1.5 mm以上且5.0 mm以下。高凸部1b之高度hb為高凸部之最大高度，亦大致為與大多邊形區域BT之重心對應之位置之高度。高度hb係以與後述之表面片材1之纖維密度之比率(1)相同之方式測定。 又，關於高凸部1b之自底面之隆起角度θ3(參照圖10)，就即便於大量之經血時亦不易於接觸肌膚之部分殘留經血之觀點而言，較佳為70°以上，進而較佳為75°以上，且較佳為90°以下，進而較佳為85°以下，更具體而言，較佳為70°以上且90°以下，進而較佳為75°以上且85°以下。隆起角度θ3係於測定上述高度hb時同時進行測定。 於表面片材1中，關於低凸部1s之厚度方向(Z方向)之頂點之高度hs(參照圖11)，就提高表面片材1之良好之肌膚觸感，且強化纖維之密度梯度而提昇液體之引入性之觀點而言，較佳為0.4 mm以上，進而較佳為0.8 mm以上，且較佳為4.5 mm以下，進而較佳為2.5 mm以下，更具體而言，較佳為0.4 mm以上且4.5 mm以下，進而較佳為0.8 mm以上且2.5 mm以下。低凸部1s之高度hs為低凸部1s之最大高度，亦為與小多邊形區域ST之重心對應之位置之高度。高度hs係以與後述之表面片材1之纖維密度之比率(1)相同之方式測定。 又，關於低凸部1s之自底面之隆起角度θ4(參照圖11)，就即便於大量之經血時亦不易於接觸肌膚之部分殘留經血之觀點而言，較佳為25°以上，進而較佳為30°以上，且較佳為70°以下，進而較佳為65°以下，更具體而言，較佳為25°以上且70°以下，進而較佳為30°以上且65°以下。隆起角度θ4於測定上述高度hs時同時進行測定。 於表面片材1中，高凸部1b如圖6所示般，對高凸部1b以通過其頂部1bt之方式於厚度方向Z進行剖面觀察時，具有內部被第1纖維層11填滿之頂部1bt側之高凸部頂部1bu、及與頂部1bt為相反側之第2纖維層12側之高凸部底部1bd，進而具有第2纖維層12。此處，高凸部頂部1bu及高凸部底部1bd之區別在於，將高凸部1b以通過其頂部1bt之方式於厚度方向Z假想性地二等分時，將第1纖維層11二等分而成之2個部位中，將頂部1bt側之部位設為高凸部頂部1bu，將第2纖維層12側之部位設為高凸部底部1bd。又，低凸部1s於對低凸部1s以通過其頂部1st之方式於厚度方向Z進行剖面觀察時，具有內部被第1纖維層11填滿之頂部1st側之低凸部頂部1su、及與頂部1st為相反側之第2纖維層12側之低凸部底部1sd，進而具有第2纖維層12。此處，低凸部頂部1su及低凸部底部1sd之區別在於，將低凸部1s以通過其頂部1st之方式於厚度方向Z假想性地二等分時，將第1纖維層11二等分而成之2個部位中，將頂部1st側之部位設為低凸部頂部1su，將第2纖維層12側之部位設為低凸部底部1sd。 再者，所謂將高凸部1b沿厚度方向Z假想性地二等分時之厚度係指實質上無荷重狀態下之厚度。所謂實質上無荷重係指為了於作為纖維集合體之不織布之性質上抑制值之不均而為0.049 kPa荷重。 又，所謂將低凸部1s沿厚度方向Z假想性地二等分時之厚度係指與上述將高凸部1b沿厚度方向Z假想性地二等分時之厚度同樣地實質上無荷重狀態下之厚度。所謂實質上無荷重係指為了於作為纖維集合體之不織布之性質上抑制值之不均而為0.049 kPa荷重。 於表面片材1中，如圖6所示，低凸部頂部1su之纖維密度高於高凸部頂部1bu之纖維密度，且低於第2纖維層12之纖維密度。較佳為關於立體圓頂構造之低凸部1s，其纖維密度於其厚度方向(Z方向)之頂部1st之頂點(高度hs之基準點)在低凸部1s中最高。同樣地，關於立體圓頂構造之高凸部1b，其纖維密度於其厚度方向(Z方向)之頂部1bt之頂點(高度hs之基準點)在高凸部1b中最高。而且，低凸部1s之低凸部頂部1su之纖維密度高於高凸部1b之高凸部頂部1bu之纖維密度。第2纖維層12之纖維密度高於低凸部1s及高凸部1b之纖維密度。即，第2纖維層12之纖維密度高於低凸部1s之頂部1st之頂點(高度hs之基準點)之纖維密度、及高凸部1b之頂部1bt之頂點(高度hs之基準點)之纖維密度。若將此種構成之表面片材1用於吸收性物品之一例之衛生棉10，則使用中排泄之液體容易向接觸穿著者之肌膚之高凸部1b之頂部1bt轉移，容易被引入至高凸部1b內部，不易於表面殘留液體。而且，引入至高凸部1b內部之液體容易轉移至第2纖維層12，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面。又，即便引入至高凸部1b內部之液體大量，亦容易發揮引入至纖維密度較高之低凸部1s內之作用，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面，使用感提昇。該「液體不易返回至表面」之效果於如下方面有利：於用作衛生棉10之表面片材1之情形時，暫時被吸收至吸收體3之液體即便受到穿著者之耐壓，亦不易回滲。 關於低凸部1s之厚度方向(Z方向)之頂點(高度hs之基準點)之纖維密度ds相對於高凸部1b之厚度方向(Z方向)之頂點(高度hb之基準點)之纖維密度db的比率(ds/db)，就強化排泄之體液之引入性之觀點而言，較佳為1.2倍以上，進而較佳為1.5倍以上，且較佳為3.0倍以下，進而較佳為2.5倍以下，更具體而言，較佳為1.2倍以上且3.0倍以下，進而較佳為1.5倍以上且2.5倍以下。 表面片材1之纖維密度之比率可使用以下所記載之2個方法(1)及(2)中之任一者進行測量。 (1)於表面片材1之基重大致均勻(一致)之情形(或可判斷為大致均勻之情形)時，測量表面片材1之切斷面之高度(厚度)。 (2)於表面片材1之基重不均勻之情形(或可判斷為不均勻之情形)時，測量表面片材1之切斷面之纖維間之平均距離。 此處，表面片材1之基重是否大致均勻之判斷如下所述般進行。 自表面片材1取出10個以上之X方向10 cm、Y方向10 cm之尺寸之切割樣品，測量各者之基重時，標準偏差σ之3倍值(3σ)為平均值μ之10%以內，若外觀上未看到纖維不均，則判斷為大致均勻。但是，較佳為考慮於微小區域組成不同等各種因素而綜合判斷。 首先，對(1)之方法進行說明。 自平面觀察下之表面片材1，沿通過高凸部1b之重心(Z方向之頂點)與兩端之2個熔接部6(中間接合部61)之直線切斷而製作高凸部1b測定用樣品。同樣地，沿通過低凸部1s之重心(Z方向之頂點)與兩端之2個熔接部6(2個中間接合部61或2個其他接合部62)之直線切斷而製作低凸部1s測定用樣品。此時，注意儘量避免因切斷而發生各測定用樣品之高度之減少等情況。 所獲得之各測定用樣品之剖面之測量係使用日本電子股份有限公司製造之電子顯微鏡 JCM-5100，於濺鍍時間30秒(Pt)、加速電壓10 KV之條件下進行，拍攝測定用樣品之兩端之熔接部6之至少一者，或組合複數張圖像而使上述熔接部6為可知狀況，自拍攝圖像測量各測定用樣品之高度(厚度)。再者，圖像之測量亦可使用印刷物或PC(Pesonal Computer，個人電腦)畫面上之任一者進行。 於(1)之方法中，將低凸部1s測定用樣品之中央部之高度hs(厚度)除以高凸部1b測定用樣品之中央部之高度hb(厚度)而作為密度之比率(ds/db)。 其次，對(2)之方法進行說明。 與(1)之方法同樣地對剖面進行測量，但除藉由(1)之方法進行測定以外，以放大倍率500～1000倍對各測定用樣品之剖面進行拍攝。於在放大拍攝圖像各者之對象測定部位(各測定用樣品之中央部)且寬度方向(平面方向)上纖維根數為3～7根之區域，使用圖像解析裝置(NEXUS製造之NEWQUBE ver.4.20)求出纖維之最接近重心間距離。 於上述測量中，於高度(厚度)方向上大致整體地進行測量，且不產生最接近重心間距離之重複。又，關於剖面，測量至少3個部位、較佳為5個部位、更佳為10個部位，使用其平均值。 於(2)之方法中，將低凸部1s測定用樣品之中央部之最接近重心間距離除以高凸部1b測定用樣品之中央部之最接近重心間距離而作為密度之比率(ds/db)。 於表面片材1中，如圖6所示，各高凸部1b、各低凸部1s及各連結凸部1c成為被構成第1纖維層11之纖維填滿之實心構造，又，熔接部6(中間接合部61及其他接合部62)彼此間之第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12之界面成為未被接合但跨及全域地密接之狀態。如此，不會於第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12之間產生空隙。 於表面片材1中，構成第1纖維層11之纖維於纖維之交點處藉由熱風方式進行熔合。構成高凸部頂部1bu及低凸部頂部1su之纖維與構成高凸部底部1bd及低凸部底部1sd之纖維相同。 於表面片材1中，作為構成第1纖維層11之纖維，就與第2纖維層12之熱熔合性之觀點而言，良好地使用熱熔合性纖維、尤其包含熱塑性聚合物材料之纖維。作為熱熔合性纖維之例，可列舉熱熔合性芯鞘型複合纖維、熱伸長性纖維、非熱伸長性纖維、熱收縮纖維、非熱收縮性纖維、立體捲縮纖維、潛在捲縮性纖維、中空纖維等，於表面片材1中可良好地使用非熱收縮性纖維。 作為熱塑性聚合物材料，可列舉聚乙烯或聚丙烯等聚烯烴、聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯等聚酯、聚醯胺等。作為構成第1纖維層11之纖維，尤其可良好地使用包含該等熱塑性聚合物材料之組合之芯鞘型複合纖維(例如將聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯或聚丙烯作為芯成分、將聚乙烯作為鞘成分者等)。芯鞘型複合纖維可為同心芯鞘型，可為偏心芯鞘型，可為並列(side-by-side)型，亦可為異型形，較佳為同心芯鞘型。 於芯鞘型複合纖維中，熱熔合性纖維較佳為至少表面由聚烯烴系樹脂形成。若作為表面片材1之構成纖維的熱熔合性纖維之表面由聚烯烴系樹脂形成，則藉由熱處理使纖維表面熔融，容易產生纖維處理劑向纖維中之滲透，藉此發揮可有效率地降低所需之部分之親水度之效果。作為形成熱熔合性纖維之表面之聚烯烴系樹脂，例如可列舉聚乙烯、聚丙烯等，可單獨使用該等之1種或混合2種以上而使用。 第1纖維層11較佳為含有60質量%以上、尤其80質量%以上且100質量%以下之如下纖維作為上述熱熔合性纖維，該纖維於後述之第2纖維層12中所含有之潛在捲縮性纖維之收縮起始溫度下不會收縮。亦可使第1纖維層11含有第2纖維層12中所含有之潛在捲縮性纖維，就使第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12之間產生使第1纖維層11疏、使第2纖維層12密之疏密梯度之觀點而言，第1纖維層11中之潛在捲縮性纖維之含有率較佳為80質量%以下。 關於構成第1纖維層11之熱熔合性纖維為非複合纖維(單纖維)之情形時之結晶化度，就熱風回覆性之觀點而言，較佳為30%以上，更佳為35%以上，進而較佳為40%以上，且就質地之觀點而言，較佳為60%以下，更佳為50%以下，進而較佳為45%以下。 於構成第1纖維層11之熱熔合性纖維為具有複數種樹脂之複合纖維之情形時，較佳為熔點相對較高之高熔點樹脂及熔點相對較低之低熔點樹脂各自具有下述之結晶化度。於高熔點樹脂(熱熔合性纖維為芯鞘型複合纖維之情形時之芯成分)為聚丙烯樹脂(PP)之情形時，就質地之觀點而言，結晶化度較佳為60%以下，更佳為50%以下，進而較佳為45%以下，且就熱風回覆性之觀點而言，較佳為30%以上，更佳為35%以上，進而較佳為40%以上。於高熔點樹脂(熱熔合性纖維為芯鞘型複合纖維之情形時之芯成分)為聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯(PET)之情形時，就質地之觀點而言，結晶化度較佳為50%以下，更佳為40%以下，進而較佳為30%以下，且就熱風回覆性之觀點而言，較佳為15%以上，更佳為20%以上，進而較佳為25%以上。樹脂之結晶化度係藉由以下之方法而求出。 ＜樹脂之結晶化度之測定方法＞ 樹脂之結晶化度χ係藉由下述式(1)而求出。 χ＝(1－(ρc－ρ)/(ρc－ρa))×100 (1) 上述式(1)中之「ρc」為樹脂之結晶密度，於樹脂為PP之情形時為0.936[g/cm3 ]，於樹脂為PET之情形時為1.457[g/cm3 ](參照下述參考文獻3)。 又，上述式(1)中之「ρa」為樹脂之非晶密度，於樹脂為PP之情形時為0.850[g/cm3 ]，於樹脂為PET之情形時為1.335[g/cm3 ](參照下述參考文獻3)。 又，上述式(1)中之「ρ」係藉由下述式(2)而求出。 ρ＝ρc－(ρc－ρa)×(勞侖茲密度B－勞侖茲密度A)/(勞侖茲密度B－勞侖茲密度C) (2) 上述式(2)中之「勞侖茲密度A」係藉由下述式(3)而求出。又，下述式(3)中之「n」為平均折射率，使用上述測定值之平行方向之折射率「np」與垂直方向之折射率「nv」，由下述式(4)求出。 勞侖茲密度A＝(n2 －1)/(n2 ＋1) (3) n2 ＝(np2 ＋2nv2 )/3 (4) 又，上述式(2)中之「勞侖茲密度B」係將各樹脂種之結晶之折射率設為n代入上述式(3)中而求出，於PP之情形時，使用n＝1.52，於PET之情形時，使用n＝1.64(分別參照下述參考文獻2、參考文獻1)。 又，上述式(2)中之「勞侖茲密度C」係將各樹脂種之非晶折射率設為n代入上述式(3)中而求出，於PP之情形時，使用n＝1.47，於PET之情形時，使用n＝1.58(分別參照下述參考文獻2、參考文獻1)。 ・參考文獻1：「飽和聚酯樹脂手冊」(發行單位：日刊工業新聞社，初版，1989年) ・參考文獻2：「聚合物手冊(POLYMER HANDBOOK)」(A WILEY-INTERSCIENCE PUBLICATION，1999年) ・參考文獻3：「塑膠成形品之高次結構解析入門」(編者(社)塑膠成形加工學會，初版，2006年) 再者，一般而言，結晶化度根據其測定方法或條件，視為結晶之構造不同，因此無法進行不同之測定方法、條件間之絕對值之討論。 構成熱熔合性纖維之各樹脂成分之熔點係使用示差掃描型熱量計(Seiko Instruments股份有限公司製造之DSC6200)，以升溫速度10℃/min進行較細地裁斷之纖維試樣(樣品重量2 mg)之熱分析，測定各樹脂之熔解峰溫度，由該熔解峰溫度予以定義。又，作為樹脂成分之分子開始流動之溫度，將該樹脂成分熔合至可測量到纖維之熔合點強度之程度的溫度作為軟化點。於藉由該方法無法明確地測得樹脂成分之熔點之情形時，將該樹脂定義為「不具有熔點之樹脂」。於此情形時，使用軟化點代替熔點。 作為構成第1纖維層11之纖維集合體之形態，例如可列舉藉由梳棉法而形成之纖維網、藉由熱熔合法而形成之不織布、藉由水刺法而形成之不織布、藉由針刺法而形成之不織布、藉由溶劑接著法而形成之不織布、藉由紡黏法而形成之不織布、藉由熔噴法而形成之不織布、或針織物等。所謂藉由梳棉法而形成之纖維網係指不織布化之前之狀態之纖維集合體。即，處於未被實施對製造不織布時使用之梳棉網施加之後續處理、例如利用熱風法或軋光機法之加熱熔合處理的狀態之纖維彼此較鬆弛地纏繞之狀態之纖維集合體。於將藉由梳棉法而形成之纖維網用於第1纖維層11之情形時，於使第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12接合之同時、或接合後，藉由熱熔合或溶劑將第1纖維層11中之纖維彼此接著、或使其機械地交絡。 第2纖維層12亦包含纖維集合體。第2纖維層12包含呈螺旋狀捲縮之潛在捲縮性纖維即熱收縮性纖維作為呈螺旋狀捲縮之捲縮纖維。所謂潛在捲縮性纖維係指具有如下性質之纖維，即，於加熱之前可與先前之不織布用纖維同樣地處理，且藉由收縮溫度下之加熱而表現出螺旋狀之捲縮而收縮。 本實施形態之表面片材1係藉由將包含潛在捲縮性纖維100%之第2纖維層12與包含上述熱熔合性纖維100%之第1纖維層11進行積層並使兩者局部地接合後，使第2纖維層12中之潛在捲縮性纖維熱收縮，使第2纖維層12熱收縮，而使第1纖維層11中之熔接部6以外之部分呈凸狀隆起而獲得者。藉由使用潛在捲縮性纖維作為第2纖維層12之構成纖維，可同時表現出第2纖維層12之熱收縮性與熱收縮後之第2纖維層12、進而表面片材1之彈性體之行為之兩者。 潛在捲縮性纖維包含以例如收縮率不同之2種熱塑性聚合物材料作為成分之偏心芯鞘型複合纖維或並列型複合纖維。作為其例，可列舉日本專利特開平9-296325號公報或日本專利2759331號說明書等所記載者。作為收縮率不同之2種熱塑性聚合物材料之例，例如可列舉乙烯-丙烯無規共聚物與聚丙烯之組合。 收縮溫度係指潛在捲縮性纖維或捲縮纖維所具有之複數種熱塑性聚合物中軟化點相對較低之成分與軟化點相對較高之成分之兩軟化點間之溫度。又，收縮起始溫度係指軟化點相對較低之成分之軟化點。潛在捲縮性纖維被加熱至兩軟化點間之溫度時，僅具有較低之軟化點之成分開始收縮。其結果為，纖維整體呈螺旋狀收縮而表現出捲縮，形成捲縮纖維。後述之熱收縮步驟中之熱處理溫度可對應於構成潛在捲縮性纖維之樹脂之軟化點，即對應於收縮溫度而適當調整。 作為構成第2纖維層12之纖維集合體之形態，可列舉：含有潛在捲縮性纖維且藉由梳棉法而形成之纖維網、藉由熱熔合法而形成之不織布、藉由水刺法而形成之不織布、藉由針刺法而形成之不織布、藉由溶劑接著法而形成之不織布、藉由紡黏法而形成之不織布、藉由熔噴法而形成之不織布，較佳為藉由梳棉法而形成之纖維網。 關於構成第2纖維層12之纖維集合體，就提高纖維之自由度而提高黏性物之透過性之觀點而言，較佳為未利用熔接部6而與第1纖維層11接合之部分之構成纖維彼此間相互未被熱熔合。 亦可於第1纖維層11及第2纖維層12中混合上述以外之纖維、例如嫘縈、棉、親水化丙烯酸系纖維等吸水性纖維。 例如，亦可於第2纖維層12中混合調配於第1纖維層11之熱熔合性纖維等潛在捲縮性纖維以外之纖維。熱熔合性纖維例如以使形狀穩定、提高防褶皺/皺褶性為目的而調配。 於表面片材1中，第2纖維層12較佳為含有60質量%以上、尤其80質量%以上且100質量%以下之潛在捲縮性纖維。此處所謂之熱收縮性纖維之含有率係包括表現出螺旋狀之捲縮者與未表現出螺旋狀之捲縮者之兩者在內之含有率。藉由潛在捲縮性纖維之含有率為80質量%以上，可使第1纖維層11之熔接部6以外之部分充分地呈凸狀變形，可獲得蓬鬆之表面片材1。 於表面片材1中，關於第1纖維層11之厚度，就施加來自肌膚之壓力時可壓縮變形之部分變得尤其充分，提高鬆軟感之觀點而言，高凸部1b之第1纖維層11之厚度較佳為0.6 mm以上，尤佳為1 mm以上，且較佳為7 mm以下，尤佳為3 mm以下。又，低凸部1s之第1纖維層11之厚度較佳為0.3 mm以上，尤佳為0.5 mm以上，且較佳為4.4 mm以下，尤佳為1.5 mm以下。關於第2纖維層12，就穩定地表現出由第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12之間之疏密梯度所產生之優異之液體引入性之觀點而言，較佳為密度高於第1纖維層11且厚度薄於第1纖維層11。又，就表面片材1之質感、質地之觀點而言，高凸部1b之第2纖維層12之厚度較佳為0.1 mm以上，尤佳為0.2 mm以上，且較佳為3.4 mm以下，尤佳為1.5 mm以下。又，低凸部1s之第2纖維層12之厚度較佳為0.1 mm以上，尤佳為0.2 mm以上，且較佳為2.2 mm以下，尤佳為1.0 mm以下。 關於表面片材1，就用於吸收性物品時之蓬鬆感或柔軟度之觀點而言，其基重較佳為20 g/m2 以上，尤佳為50 g/m2 以上，且較佳為200 g/m2 以下，尤佳為100 g/m2 以下。於表面片材1中，由於第2纖維層12使用潛在捲縮性纖維，故而藉由經過後述之熱收縮步驟，不織布狀態時之基重較纖維網狀態時大。因此，與不使用潛在捲縮性纖維之情形不同，不採用積層複數片纖維網等方法便可容易地獲得具有較大基重之表面片材1。藉由如此具有較大之基重，可藉由提高緩衝感而使質地舒適，可藉由排泄液於表面片材上未擴散地被吸收而降低液體對肌膚之附著量，尤其是可藉由使吸收經血後之外觀潔白而提昇安心感及清潔感。基重係藉由將表面片材1裁斷成50 mm×50 mm以上之大小而採集測定片，使用最小顯示1 mg之電子天平測定該測定片之重量，並換算成基重而求出。 於表面片材1中，如圖6所示，對高凸部1b以通過其頂部1bt之方式於厚度方向Z進行剖面觀察時，形成為第1纖維層11中之頂部1bt側之高凸部頂部1bu之親水度高於第1纖維層11中之第2纖維層12側之高凸部底部1bd之親水度，第2纖維層12之親水度高於高凸部頂部1bu之親水度。較佳為高凸部頂部1bu、高凸部底部1bd、高凸部1b之第2纖維層12之親水度之大小關係為：第2纖維層12之親水度＞高凸部頂部1bu之親水度＞高凸部底部1bd之親水度。若將此種構成之表面片材1用於吸收性物品之一例之衛生棉10，則使用中排泄之液體容易向接觸穿著者之肌膚之高凸部1b之頂部1bt轉移，不易於表面殘留液體。而且，引入至高凸部1b內部之液體容易轉移至第2纖維層12，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面，使用感提昇。 又，於表面片材1中，如圖6所示，對低凸部1s以通過其頂部1st之方式於厚度方向Z進行剖面觀察時，形成為第1纖維層11中之頂部1st側之低凸部頂部1su之親水度高於第1纖維層11中之第2纖維層12側之低凸部底部1sd之親水度，低凸部頂部1su之親水度高於高凸部底部1bd之親水度，第2纖維層12之親水度高於低凸部頂部1su之親水度。較佳為低凸部頂部1su、低凸部底部1sd、高凸部1b之高凸部頂部1bu、低凸部1s之第2纖維層12之親水度之大小關係為：第2纖維層12之親水度＞低凸部頂部1su之親水度＞低凸部底部1sd之親水度及高凸部1b之高凸部底部1bd之親水度。若將此種構成之表面片材1用於吸收性物品之一例之衛生棉10，則使用中排泄之液體容易向接觸穿著者之肌膚之高凸部1b之頂部1bt轉移，不易於表面殘留液體。而且，引入至高凸部1b內部之液體容易轉移至第2纖維層12，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面。又，即便引入至高凸部1b內部之液體大量，亦容易發揮引入至纖維密度較高之低凸部1s內之作用，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面，使用感提昇。 關於上述之高凸部1b及低凸部1s，所謂高凸部頂部1bu之親水度係指第1纖維層11中之高凸部1b之頂部1bt之親水度，所謂低凸部頂部1su之親水度係指第1纖維層11中之低凸部1s之頂部1st之親水度。又，所謂高凸部底部1bd之親水度係指第1纖維層11中之高凸部1b之最下部(高凸部1b之與頂部1bt為相反側之部位)之親水度，所謂低凸部底部1sd之親水度係指第1纖維層11中之低凸部1s之最下部(低凸部1s之與頂部1st為相反側之部位)之親水度。又，所謂第2纖維層12之親水度係指對第2纖維層12沿厚度方向Z測定親水度時顯示最高之親水度之部位之該親水度，高凸部1b之第2纖維層12之親水度與低凸部1s之第2纖維層12之親水度相同。又，本發明中所謂之「親水度」，係基於藉由以下所述之方法測得之纖維之接觸角而判斷其程度。具體而言，親水度較低與接觸角較大含義相同，親水度較高與接觸角較小含義相同。 ＜接觸角之測定方法＞ 利用剃刀之刃將測定對象之表面片材1中橫貫高凸部1b之頂部1bt及低凸部1s之頂部1st之部位垂直地切斷。利用光學顯微鏡對該切斷面進行觀察，自厚度方向Z之特定之部位取出纖維，測定水對該纖維之接觸角。作為測定裝置，使用協和界面科學股份有限公司製造之自動接觸角儀MCA-J。接觸角之測定係使用蒸餾水。將自噴墨方式水滴噴出部(Cluster Technology公司製造，噴出部孔徑為25 μm之脈衝噴射器CTC-25)噴出之液量設定為20微微升，將水滴滴加至纖維之正上方。繼而，將滴加之情況錄影於連接於水平設置之相機之高速錄影裝置中。就其後進行圖像解析之觀點而言，錄影裝置較理想為組入有高速捕獲裝置之個人電腦。本測定中，每隔17 msec錄影一次圖像。於所錄影之影像中，對水滴滴落於自表面片材1取出之纖維之最初之圖像藉由附屬軟體FAMAS(軟體之版本為2.6.2，解析方法為液滴法，解析方法為θ/2法，圖像處理演算法為無反射，圖像處理影像模式為圖框，臨限位準為200，未進行曲率修正)進行圖像解析，算出水滴之接觸空氣之面與纖維所成之角作為接觸角。自測定對象之表面片材1取出之纖維係裁斷為纖維長度1 mm，將該纖維載於接觸角儀之樣品台並水平地維持。對1根該纖維測定不同之2個部位之接觸角。測量N＝5根之接觸角至小數點後1位，將合計10個部位之測定值之平均值(四捨五入至小數點後第2位)定義為接觸角。再者，以下於稱為「水之接觸角」之情形時為藉由本測定方法所測得之接觸角。 於表面片材1中，如上所述，於第1纖維層11中，高凸部頂部1bu之親水度高於高凸部底部1bd之親水度，低凸部頂部1su之親水度高於低凸部底部1sd之親水度。為了對第1纖維層11設置此種親水度之梯度，較佳為於第1纖維層11含有附著有後述之纖維處理劑之熱熔合性纖維。於此情形時，於第1纖維層11中，自高凸部頂部1bu朝向高凸部底部1bd、或自低凸部頂部1su朝向低凸部底部1sd，親水度可逐漸變低，親水度亦可階梯性地變低。尤其較佳為親水度自高凸部頂部1bu朝向高凸部底部1bd逐漸變低，且較佳為親水度自低凸部頂部1su朝向低凸部底部1sd逐漸變低。所謂「親水度逐漸變化」係指於高凸部頂部1bu與高凸部底部1bd之間、或低凸部頂部1su與低凸部底部1sd之間不存在親水度大幅地變化之邊界面。藉由採用該構成，體液容易自肌膚抵接面側順利地轉移至非肌膚抵接面側，因此使用感提昇。此處，所謂親水度「逐漸」變低係指親水度具有層次(gradation)，親水度自高凸部頂部1bu朝向高凸部底部1bd、或自低凸部頂部1su朝向低凸部底部1sd緩緩變低之狀態。 於第1纖維層11中，親水度自高凸部頂部1bu朝向高凸部底部1bd、或自低凸部頂部1su朝向低凸部底部1sd逐漸變低可藉由下述方法進行測定。第1纖維層11中，例如將高凸部1b於厚度方向Z上假想性地三等分。繼而，測定將高凸部1b三等分之2條假想線各者上之1點、以及高凸部1b之頂部1bt及高凸部1b之最下部之共計4點之親水度。此時，將接觸角自第1纖維層11之頂部1bt朝向最下部依序變高之情形稱為「親水度逐漸變低」。於低凸部1s之情形時亦相同。 無論親水度逐漸變低、抑或階梯性地變低，均於第1纖維層11中，關於高凸部頂部1bu之水之接觸角，就第1纖維層11不會超出需要地保持液體之觀點而言，較佳為65°以上，更佳為70°以上，進而較佳為73°以上，且就液體不於第1纖維層11之表面流動地被吸收之觀點而言，較佳為90°以下，更佳為85°以下，進而較佳為75°以下。另一方面，於第1纖維層11中，關於高凸部底部1bd之水之接觸角，就抑制自第2纖維層12之回液之觀點而言，較佳為75°以上，更佳為80°以上，進而較佳為85°以上，且就吸液時使液體快速地轉移至第2纖維層12之觀點而言，較佳為90°以下，更佳為88°以下，進而較佳為86°以下。 又，無論親水度逐漸變低、抑或階梯性地變低，均於第1纖維層11中，關於低凸部頂部1su之水之接觸角，就高凸部底部1bd內之液體容易轉移至低凸部1s之觀點而言，較佳為65°以上，更佳為70°以上，進而較佳為73°以上，且就液體不於第1纖維層11之表面流動地被吸收之觀點而言，較佳為90°以下，更佳為85°以下，進而較佳為75°以下。另一方面，於第1纖維層11中，關於低凸部底部1sd之水之接觸角，就抑制自第2纖維層12之回液之觀點而言，較佳為75°以上，更佳為80°以上，進而較佳為85°以上，且就吸液時使液體快速地轉移至第2纖維層12之觀點而言，較佳為90°以下，更佳為88°以下，進而較佳為86°以下。 關於高凸部底部1bd之水之接觸角與高凸部頂部1bu之水之接觸角之差，就防止回液之觀點而言，較佳為1°以上，更佳為5°以上，進而較佳為7°以上，且就吸液時使液體快速地轉移至第2纖維層12之觀點而言，較佳為20°以下，更佳為18°以下，進而較佳為15°以下。 就相同之觀點而言，高凸部頂部1bu之水之接觸角相對於高凸部底部1bd之水之接觸角之比、即將高凸部底部1bd之接觸角之值作為分母且將高凸部頂部1bu之接觸角之值作為分子時之比較佳為0.7以上，更佳為0.75以上，進而較佳為0.8以上，且較佳為0.95以下，更佳為0.9以下，進而較佳為0.85以下。 關於低凸部底部1sd之水之接觸角與低凸部頂部1su之水之接觸角之差，就防止回液之觀點而言，較佳為1°以上，更佳為5°以上，進而較佳為7°以上，且就吸液時使液體快速地轉移至第2纖維層12之觀點而言，較佳為20°以下，更佳為18°以下，進而較佳為15°以下。 就相同之觀點而言，低凸部頂部1su之水之接觸角相對於低凸部底部1sd之水之接觸角之比、即將低凸部底部1sd之水之接觸角之值作為分母且將低凸部頂部1su之接觸角之值作為分子時之比較佳為0.7以上，更佳為0.75以上，進而較佳為0.8以上，且較佳為0.95以下，更佳為0.9以下，進而較佳為0.85以下。 關於高凸部底部1bd之水之接觸角與低凸部頂部1su之水之接觸角之差，就高凸部底部1bd內之液體容易轉移至低凸部1s之觀點而言，較佳為1°以上，更佳為5°以上，進而較佳為7°以上，且就吸液時使液體快速地轉移至第2纖維層12之觀點而言，較佳為20°以下，更佳為18°以下，進而較佳為15°以下。 就相同之觀點而言，低凸部頂部1su之水之接觸角相對於高凸部底部1bd之水之接觸角之比、即將高凸部底部1bd之水之接觸角之值作為分母且將低凸部頂部1su之水之接觸角之值作為分子時之比較佳為0.7以上，更佳為0.75以上，進而較佳為0.8以上，且較佳為0.9以下，更佳為0.88以下，進而較佳為0.85以下。 與親水度具有梯度之第1纖維層11對比，於表面片材1中，第2纖維層12之親水度於該第2纖維層12之任一部位均大致相同。第2纖維層12之水之接觸角係以小於高凸部頂部1bu及低凸部頂部1su之水之接觸角作為條件，就不於第2纖維層12持續保持液體之觀點而言，較佳為50°以上，更佳為55°以上，進而較佳為57°以上，且就自第1纖維層11引出液體之觀點而言，較佳為70°以下，更佳為65°以下，進而較佳為60°以下。 第2纖維層12之水之接觸角相對於高凸部頂部1bu及低凸部頂部1su中水之接觸角較小之部位之水之接觸角的比、即將高凸部頂部1bu及低凸部頂部1su中水之接觸角較小之部位之水之接觸角作為分母且將第2纖維層12之水之接觸角之值作為分子時之比較佳為0.65以上，更佳為0.7以上，進而較佳為0.75以上，且較佳為0.95以下，更佳為0.9以下，進而較佳為0.85以下。 又，第2纖維層12之水之接觸角相對於高凸部頂部1bu及低凸部頂部1su中水之接觸角較大之部位之水之接觸角的比、即將高凸部頂部1bu及低凸部頂部1su中水之接觸角較大之部位之水之接觸角作為分母且將第2纖維層12之水之接觸角之值作為分子時之比較佳為0.55以上，更佳為0.6以上，進而較佳為0.65以上，且較佳為0.85以下，更佳為0.8以下，進而較佳為0.75以下。 為了製造包含具有如以上所述之接觸角(親水度之關係)之各層、各部位的表面片材1，使用後述之纖維處理劑，且適當地控制後述之熱風法中之熱風之吹送條件、即熱風之溫度或風量即可。 其次，對製造表面片材1時使用之纖維處理劑進行說明。纖維處理劑附著於表面片材1之構成纖維之表面，可使該構成纖維之表面之親水度較附著該纖維處理劑之前變高。於表面片材1中，如上所述，第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12之親水度不同，其主要原因在於第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12所含有之纖維處理劑之種類不同。以下，對不同纖維層之纖維處理劑進行說明。 [第1纖維層中所含之纖維處理劑] 附著於第1纖維層11所具有之熱熔合性纖維之纖維處理劑含有聚有機矽氧烷((A)成分)、磷酸烷基酯((B)成分)、及下述之通式(1)所表示之陰離子界面活性劑、或聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯((C)成分)。作為(C)成分，可使用選自由下述通式(1)所表示之陰離子界面活性劑及聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯所組成之群中之1種或2種以上。再者，(C)成分係指不含作為(B)成分之磷酸烷基酯之成分。 [化1](式中，Z表示可含有酯基、醯胺基、胺基、聚氧伸烷基、醚基或雙鍵之碳數1～12之直鏈或支鏈烷基鏈，R1 及R2 分別獨立地表示可含有酯基、醯胺基、聚氧伸烷基、醚基或雙鍵之碳數2～16之直鏈或支鏈烷基，X表示-SO3 M、-OSO3 M或-COOM，M表示H、Na、K、Mg、Ca或銨) 附著有含有上述(A)～(C)之3種成分之纖維處理劑之纖維藉由於構成該纖維表面之樹脂之軟化點以上之溫度下實施熱處理，聚有機矽氧烷((A)成分)會促進具有烷基鏈之陰離子界面活性劑((C)成分)向纖維內部之滲透。因此，纖維之表面之親水度藉由熱處理而變化為較低之值。其原因在於，聚有機矽氧烷尤其會促進具有2鏈以上之烷基鏈之陰離子界面活性劑向纖維內部之滲透，纖維表面之親水度藉由熱處理而容易降低。推斷其原因在於，由於聚有機矽氧烷之聚矽氧烷鏈與陰離子界面活性劑具有之烷基鏈不相容，故而纖維加熱熔融時，陰離子界面活性劑會向更容易親和之纖維內部滲透。 上述(C)成分中，上述通式(1)所表示之陰離子界面活性劑具有2鏈以上之烷基鏈，該烷基蓬鬆而能以包入親水基之方式向纖維內部滲透，因此於使用其之情形時，容易藉由聚有機矽氧烷之存在而促進向纖維內部之滲透。 又，上述(C)成分中，聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯容易使疏水鏈呈放射狀配置，成為容易包圍親水基之構造，因此於使用其之情形時，與使用通常之具有直線狀烴鏈之界面活性劑之情形相比，容易藉由聚有機矽氧烷之存在而促進向纖維內部之滲透。 藉此，例如作為後述之表面片材1之製造步驟之一步驟的對纖維網吹送熱風之親水度降低步驟中，纖維網中之纖維所受到之熱量於熱風吹送面與其相反側之面(網面)自然不同，藉此，於熱風吹送面之纖維與其相反側之面之纖維，所受到之熱量不同，於熱風吹送面之纖維與其相反側之面之纖維中，該纖維之接觸角之值亦發生變化。利用該情況，可製造親水度自不織布之一面側朝向與其為相反側之另一面側具有梯度之不織布。以下，對上述(A)～(C)之3種成分進行說明。 [聚有機矽氧烷((A)成分)] 關於作為第1纖維層中所含之纖維處理劑之必須成分之一的聚有機矽氧烷，可使用直鏈狀者、具有交聯二維或三維網狀構造者之任一者，較佳為實質上直鏈狀者。 聚有機矽氧烷中本發明之較佳者之具體例為烷基烷氧基矽烷或芳基烷氧基矽烷、烷基鹵矽氧烷之聚合物或環狀矽氧烷，作為烷氧基，典型而言為甲氧基。作為烷基，適宜為碳數1以上且18以下、較佳為1以上且8以下、尤其為1以上且4以下之可具有側鏈烷基。作為芳基，可例示苯基或烷基苯基、烷氧基苯基等。亦可取代烷基或芳基而為環己基或環戊基等環狀烴基、如苄基之芳烷基。又，本發明中所謂聚有機矽氧烷，就藉由加熱使纖維表面之接觸角更高之目的之觀點而言，其概念不包含經親水性較高之聚氧乙烯(POE)鏈改性之聚有機矽氧烷。 作為較佳之最典型之聚有機矽氧烷，可列舉聚二甲基矽氧烷、聚二乙基矽氧烷、聚二丙基矽氧烷等，尤佳為聚二甲基矽氧烷。 又，作為聚有機矽氧烷之分子量，較佳為高分子量，具體而言，以重量平均分子量計較佳為10萬以上，更佳為15萬以上，進而較佳為20萬以上，且較佳為100萬以下，更佳為80萬以下，進而較佳為60萬以下。又，作為聚有機矽氧烷，亦可使用分子量不同之2種以上之聚有機矽氧烷。於使用分子量不同之2種以上之聚有機矽氧烷之情形時，其中一種之重量平均分子量較佳為10萬以上，更佳為15萬以上，進而較佳為20萬以上，且較佳為100萬以下，更佳為80萬以下，進而較佳為60萬以下，另一種之重量平均分子量較佳為未達10萬，更佳為5萬以下，更佳為3萬5千以下，進而較佳為2萬以下，且較佳為2000以上，更佳為3000以上，進而較佳為5000以上。又，重量平均分子量為10萬以上之聚有機矽氧烷與重量平均分子量未達10萬之聚有機矽氧烷之較佳之調配比率(前者：後者)以質量比計較佳為1：10～4：1，更佳為1：5～2：1。 聚有機矽氧烷之重量平均分子量係使用GPC(Gel Permeation Chromatography，凝膠滲透層析法)進行測定。測定條件如下所述。又，換算分子量之計算係以聚苯乙烯進行。 分離管柱：GMHHR-H＋GMHHR-H(陽離子) 溶析液：L Farmin DM20/CHCl3 溶劑流速：1.0 ml/min 分離管柱溫度：40℃ 關於聚有機矽氧烷於纖維處理劑中之含量，就使由熱處理所產生之親水度之變化變大之觀點而言，相對於纖維處理劑之總質量，較佳為1質量%以上，進而較佳為5質量%以上。又，關於聚有機矽氧烷於纖維處理劑中之含量，就於不織布表面容易吸收液體之觀點而言，相對於纖維處理劑之總質量，較佳為30質量%以下，進而較佳為20質量%以下。例如聚有機矽氧烷於纖維處理劑中之含量相對於纖維處理劑之總質量較佳為1質量%以上且30質量%以下，進而較佳為5質量%以上且20質量%以下。 作為聚有機矽氧烷，亦可使用市售品。例如可使用Shin-Etsu Silicones公司製造之「KF-96H-100萬Cs」、Dow Corning Toray公司製造之「SH200Fluid1000000Cs」，又，作為含有2種聚有機矽氧烷者，可使用Shin-Etsu Silicones公司製造之「KM-903」、或Dow Corning Toray公司製造之「BY22-060」。 [磷酸烷基酯((B)成分)] 作為第1纖維層11中所含之纖維處理劑之必須成分之一的磷酸烷基酯係以改良原棉之梳棉機通過性或纖維網之均勻性等特性，由此產生之不織布之生產性之提高及防止品質降低為目的而調配於纖維處理劑中者，係陰離子界面活性劑之一種。作為磷酸烷基酯之具體例，可列舉：磷酸硬脂酯、磷酸肉豆蔻酯、磷酸月桂酯、磷酸棕櫚酯等具有飽和碳鏈者、或磷酸油酯、磷酸軟脂酯等具有不飽和碳鏈者及於該等碳鏈具有側鏈者。更佳為磷酸碳鏈16～18之單或二烷基酯之完全中和或部分中和鹽。再者，作為磷酸烷基酯之鹽，可列舉鈉或鉀等鹼金屬、氨、各種胺類等。磷酸烷基酯可單獨使用1種或混合2種以上而使用。 關於磷酸烷基酯於纖維處理劑中之含量，就梳棉機通過性或纖維網之均勻性等觀點而言，相對於纖維處理劑之總質量，較佳為5質量%以上，更佳為10質量%以上，又，就不阻礙因熱處理所引起之由聚有機矽氧烷所產生之纖維之疏水化之觀點而言，相對於纖維處理劑之總質量，較佳為30質量%以下，更佳為25質量%以下。 [上述通式(1)所表示之陰離子界面活性劑((C)成分)] 作為上述通式(1)中之X為-SO3 M、即親水基為磺酸或其鹽之上述陰離子界面活性劑，例如可列舉二烷基磺酸或其等之鹽。作為二烷基磺酸之具體例，可列舉：將二(十八烷基)磺基琥珀酸、二癸基磺基琥珀酸、二(十三烷基)磺基琥珀酸、二-2-乙基己基磺基琥珀酸等二烷基磺基琥珀酸、二烷基磺基戊二酸等二羧酸酯化並將二酯之α位磺化而成之化合物；或者將2-磺基十四烷酸1-乙基酯(或醯胺)鈉鹽、或2-磺基十六烷酸1-乙基酯(或醯胺)鈉鹽等飽和脂肪酸或不飽和脂肪酸酯(或醯胺)之α位磺化而成之α-磺基脂肪酸烷基酯(或醯胺)；或者藉由將烴鏈之內部烯烴或不飽和脂肪酸之內部烯烴磺化而獲得之二烷基烯烴磺酸等。二烷基磺酸之2鏈烷基各者之碳數較佳為4個以上且14個以下，尤佳為6個以上且10個以下。 作為親水基為磺酸或其鹽之上述陰離子界面活性劑，更具體而言，可列舉下述之陰離子界面活性劑。 [化2][化3]作為上述通式(1)中之X為-OSO3 M、即親水基為硫酸或其鹽之上述陰離子界面活性劑，可列舉硫酸二烷基酯，作為其具體例，可列舉：將2-乙基己基硫酸鈉鹽、或2-己基癸基硫酸鈉鹽等具有支鏈之醇硫酸化而成之化合物、或者如於硫酸聚氧乙烯2-己基癸酯或硫酸聚氧乙烯2-己基癸酯等具有支鏈之醇與硫酸基之間導入有POE鏈之化合物、或者將12-硫酸酯硬脂酸1-甲基酯(或醯胺)、3-硫酸酯己酸1-甲基酯(或醯胺)等羥基脂肪酸酯(或醯胺)硫酸化而成之化合物等。 作為親水基為硫酸或其鹽之上述陰離子界面活性劑，更具體而言，可列舉下述之陰離子界面活性劑。 [化4]作為上述通式(1)中之X為-COOM、即親水基為羧酸或其鹽之上述陰離子界面活性劑，可列舉二烷基羧酸，作為其具體例，可列舉：將11-乙氧基十七烷酸羧酸鈉鹽或2-乙氧基五羧酸鈉鹽等羥基脂肪酸之羥基部分烷氧基化，將脂肪酸部分鈉化之化合物；或者使烷氧基化之羥基脂肪醯氯與肌胺酸或甘胺酸等胺基酸之胺基進行反應，使胺基酸部之羧酸鈉化之化合物；或者使脂肪醯氯與精胺酸之胺基進行反應而獲得之化合物等。 作為親水基為羧酸或其鹽之上述陰離子界面活性劑，更具體而言，可列舉下述之陰離子界面活性劑。 [化5]關於上述通式(1)所表示之陰離子界面活性劑((C)成分)於纖維處理劑中之含量，就使由熱處理所產生之親水度之變化變大之觀點而言，相對於纖維處理劑之總質量，較佳為1質量%以上，更佳為5質量%以上，又，就若親水度變得過高則變得容易保持液體而有損乾燥性之觀點而言，相對於纖維處理劑之總質量，較佳為20質量%以下，更佳為13質量%以下。又，上述通式(1)所表示之陰離子界面活性劑((C)成分)之上述含量較佳為1質量%以上且20質量%以下，更佳為5質量%以上且13質量%以下。 [聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯((C)成分)] 作為第1纖維層11中所含之纖維處理劑之必須成分之一的聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯係以使不織布製造時之由熱處理所產生之親水度之降低變得更顯著，即，使不織布中之所需部分之親水性顯著降低為目的而調配於纖維處理劑者，係非離子界面活性劑之一種。聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯係將多元醇之羥基以脂肪酸進行酯化而成之多元醇脂肪酸酯之一種，係於該多元醇脂肪酸酯加成環氧烷而成之改性物。聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯可依照慣例而製造，例如可依照日本專利特開2007-91852號公報而製造。 關於作為聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯(或多元醇脂肪酸酯)之原料之一的多元醇，例如可列舉：乙二醇、二乙二醇、聚乙二醇(分子量200～11000)、丙二醇、二丙二醇、聚丙二醇(分子量250～4000)、1,3-丁二醇、甘油、聚甘油(聚合度2～30)、赤藻糖醇、木糖醇、山梨糖醇、甘露醇、肌醇、山梨醇酐、山梨酯、蔗糖、海藻糖、伊爾糖、乳果寡糖(lactosucrose)、環糊精、麥芽糖醇、乳糖醇、異麥芽糖醇、潘糖醇(Panitol)、還原飴糖等。較佳為聚乙二醇、甘油、赤藻糖醇、山梨糖醇、山梨醇酐、山梨酯、蔗糖，尤佳為山梨糖醇、山梨醇酐、山梨酯。 關於作為聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯(或多元醇脂肪酸酯)之原料之另一種的脂肪酸，例如可列舉碳數6～22之飽和或不飽和脂肪酸、以該等為主成分之混合脂肪酸、或碳數8～36之支鏈脂肪酸。脂肪酸亦可局部地含有羥基。具體而言，可列舉：辛酸、壬酸、癸酸、十一烷酸、十二烷酸、十四烷酸、十六烷酸、十八烷酸、順式-9-十八碳烯酸、二十烷酸、二十二烷酸、二十四烷酸、二十六烷酸、二十八烷酸、2-乙基己基酸、異硬脂酸等，亦可使用作為源自天然之混合脂肪酸之椰子油脂肪酸、牛脂脂肪酸，較佳為碳數8～18之脂肪酸，尤佳為十二烷酸、十八烷酸、順式-9-十八碳烯酸。 關於構成聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯之多元醇脂肪酸酯之主成分，就於增大疏水鏈而提高疏水性時，藉由使分子之形狀三維地變大而非直線狀地變大，而成為容易被引入至纖維中之形狀之觀點而言，較佳為三元以上之醇之酯化物且醇成分之酯化率為90%以上者。此處，主成分係多元醇脂肪酸酯中最多之成分，相對於多元醇脂肪酸酯之總質量較佳為含有50質量%以上。例如作為三元醇，可列舉甘油，作為四元醇，可列舉赤藻糖醇，作為五元醇，可列舉木糖醇等。 作為構成聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯之多元醇脂肪酸酯，尤佳者為蓖麻油(氫化蓖麻油)。蓖麻油係以作為大戟科之植物之蓖麻之種子作為供給源之甘油脂肪酸酯，構成脂肪酸之約90%為蓖麻醇酸。即，作為聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯，較佳為甘油與以蓖麻醇酸作為主體之脂肪酸之酯油。 於聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯中，作為加成於多元醇脂肪酸酯之環氧烷，例如可列舉環氧乙烷、環氧丙烷、環氧丁烷等。作為聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯尤佳者為加成於多元醇脂肪酸酯之環氧烷為環氧乙烷之聚氧乙烯(POE)改性多元醇脂肪酸酯，尤佳者為多元醇脂肪酸酯為蓖麻油(氫化蓖麻油)之POE改性蓖麻油(POE改性氫化蓖麻油)。 於聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯中，關於環氧烷相對於多元醇脂肪酸酯之加成莫耳數，就積層不織布(第1纖維層)之液體吸收性能之提高(液體殘餘量或液體流動量之減少等)之觀點而言，較佳為超過20莫耳，尤佳為40莫耳以上。但是，若環氧烷之加成莫耳數過多，則積層不織布之親水度變得過高，例如於吸收性物品中將該積層不織布用作表面片材之情形時，有導致液體殘餘量之增大之虞，因此該加成莫耳數較佳為80莫耳以下，進而較佳為60莫耳以下。 關於聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯((C)成分)於纖維處理劑中之含量，就提高表面片材1(第1纖維層11)之親水度，並顯著地表現出不織布之製造時由熱處理所產生之親水性之降低效果之觀點而言，相對於纖維處理劑之總質量，較佳為5質量%以上，更佳為10質量%以上，又，就抑制因強親水化所致之液體殘餘量之增加之觀點而言，相對於纖維處理劑之總質量，較佳為20質量%以下，更佳為15質量%以下。 再者，成為如(A)～(C)成分之纖維處理劑含有成分之含量之基準的「纖維處理劑」若無特別說明，則為「附著於不織布之纖維處理劑」，並非附著於不織布之前之纖維處理劑。於使纖維處理劑附著於不織布之情形時，通常使用將纖維處理劑利用水等適當之溶劑進行稀釋者，因此纖維處理劑含有成分之含量、例如(A)成分於纖維處理劑中之含量可以該稀釋之纖維處理劑之總質量作為基準。 又，於如表面片材1之附著有纖維處理劑之不織布中，於對該附著之纖維處理劑進行分析之情形時，較佳為依照如下順序進行分析。首先，利用適當之溶劑將分析對象之不織布洗淨。作為該洗淨用溶劑，例如可列舉乙醇與甲醇之混合溶劑、乙醇與水之混合溶劑。於分析對象之不織布為如經期用品或者小孩用或大人用拋棄式尿布般之吸收性物品之表面片材之情形時，藉由利用乾燥機等加熱機構對吸收性物品中用於表面片材與其他構件之接合之接著劑進行加熱而使其熔融軟化後，將表面片材剝離，利用洗淨用溶劑洗淨剝離之表面片材。其次，藉由使用於洗淨分析對象之不織布之溶劑(含有纖維處理劑之洗淨用溶劑)乾燥並對其殘渣進行定量，可測得附著於該不織布之纖維處理劑之總量。又，對該殘渣根據其構成物選擇適當之管柱及溶劑，其後藉由高效液相層析法對各成分進行劃分，進而對各部分進行MS(Mass Spectrometry，質譜法)測定、NMR(Nuclear Magnetic Resource，核磁共振)測定、元素分析等，藉此可鑑定各部分之結構。又，於纖維處理劑含有高分子化合物之情形時，藉由並用凝膠滲透層析法(GPC)等方法，更容易進行構成成分之鑑定。 於第1纖維層11中所含之纖維處理劑中，(A)成分之聚有機矽氧烷與(C)成分之上述通式(1)所表示之陰離子界面活性劑之含有比率(前者：後者)以質量比計較佳為1：3～4：1，更佳為1：2～3：1。 又，於第1纖維層11中所含之纖維處理劑中，(A)成分之聚有機矽氧烷與(C)成分之聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯之含有比率(前者：後者)以質量比計較佳為1：2～3：1，更佳為1：1～2：1。 而且，於第1纖維層11中所含之纖維處理劑中，(A)成分之聚有機矽氧烷與(B)成分之磷酸烷基酯之含有比率(前者：後者)以質量比計較佳為1：5～10：1，更佳為1：2～3：1。 [其他成分] 第1纖維層11中所含之纖維處理劑除含有上述之(A)成分至(C)成分以外，亦可含有其他成分。作為除(A)成分至(C)成分以外調配之其他成分，例如可列舉改性聚矽氧等抗膠著劑等處理劑。又，作為其他成分，可使用陰離子性、陽離子性、兩性及非離子性之界面活性劑((B)成分及(C)成分以外之其他界面活性劑)。 第1纖維層11中所含之熱熔合性纖維藉由附著有纖維處理劑，與使其附著之前相比，可提高纖維之表面之親水度。就提高纖維之親水度之觀點而言，纖維處理劑之附著量相對於除纖維處理劑以外之熱熔合性纖維之總質量之比率較佳為0.1質量%以上，更佳為0.2質量%以上，且為1.5質量%以下，更佳為1.0質量%以下。 附著於纖維之纖維處理劑之量(纖維處理劑附著率)可藉由以下之方法進行測定。首先，利用電子天平準確地稱量纖維1 kg至小數點後第3位(W1)。其次，利用室溫之水以20分鐘洗淨纖維，其後利用50℃之水以2分鐘洗淨。重複3次利用該等水之洗淨後，浸漬於乙醇中，藉由40 KHz之超音波進行洗淨。利用超音波之洗淨進行30分鐘，該操作亦重複3次。洗淨後，將纖維放置乾燥1天，測定重量(W2)。藉由下式算出纖維處理劑附著率。 纖維處理劑附著率(質量%)＝{(W1－W2)/W1}×100 作為使纖維處理劑附著於熱熔合性纖維之表面之方法，可無特別限制地採用各種公知之方法。例如可列舉利用噴霧器之塗佈、利用狹縫塗佈機之塗佈、利用輥轉印之塗佈、對纖維處理劑之浸漬等。該等處理可對纖維網化之前之纖維進行，亦可於藉由各種方法將纖維纖維網化後進行。但是，必須於後述之親水度降低步驟之前進行處理。表面附著有纖維處理劑之纖維例如藉由熱風送風式乾燥機，於充分低於聚乙烯樹脂之熔點之溫度(例如110℃以下)下進行乾燥。 [第2纖維層12中所含之纖維處理劑] 如上所述，第2纖維層12之親水度高於第1纖維層11之任一部位，又，第2纖維層12之親水度於任一部位均相同。作為此種第2纖維層12中所含之纖維處理劑，可將先前用以對纖維賦予親水性之稱為油劑之纖維處理劑、例如陰離子系、陽離子系、兩性系、非離子系之界面活性劑之各種分子量者單獨使用1種、或組合2種以上而使用。再者，第2纖維層12之構成纖維較佳為未藉由含有上述(A)成分至(C)成分之特定之纖維處理劑進行處理。 作為陰離子界面活性劑之例，可列舉：磷酸烷基酯鈉鹽、烷基醚磷酸酯鈉鹽、磷酸二烷基酯鈉鹽、磺基丁二酸二烷基酯鈉鹽、苯磺酸烷基酯鈉鹽、磺酸烷基酯鈉鹽、硫酸烷基酯鈉鹽、硫酸第二烷基酯鈉鹽等(任一者之烷基均較佳為碳數6以上且22以下，尤佳為8以上且22以下)。該等亦可使用鉀鹽等其他鹼金屬鹽代替鈉鹽。 作為陽離子界面活性劑之例，可列舉烷基(或烯基)三甲基銨鹵化物、二烷基(或烯基)二甲基銨鹵化物、烷基(或烯基)吡啶鎓鹵化物等，該等化合物較佳為具有碳數6以上且18以下之烷基或烯基者。作為上述鹵化物化合物中之鹵素，可列舉氯、溴等。 作為兩性界面活性劑之例，可列舉：烷基(碳數1～30)二甲基甜菜鹼、烷基(碳數1～30)醯胺烷基(碳數1～4)二甲基甜菜鹼、烷基(碳數1～30)二羥基烷基(碳數1～30)甜菜鹼、磺基甜菜鹼型兩性界面活性劑等甜菜鹼型兩性界面活性劑、或丙胺酸型[烷基(碳數1～30)胺基丙酸型、烷基(碳數1～30)亞胺基二丙酸型等]兩性界面活性劑、烷基甜菜鹼等甘胺酸型[烷基(碳數1～30)胺基乙酸型等]兩性界面活性劑等胺基酸型兩性界面活性劑、烷基(碳數1～30)牛磺酸型等胺基磺酸型兩性界面活性劑。 作為非離子界面活性劑之例，可列舉：甘油脂肪酸酯、聚(較佳為n＝2～10)甘油脂肪酸酯、山梨醇酐脂肪酸酯等多元醇脂肪酸酯(均較佳為脂肪酸之碳數8～60)、上述多元醇脂肪酸酯之環氧烷加成物(較佳為加成莫耳數2～60莫耳)、聚氧伸烷基(加成莫耳數2～60)烷基(碳數8～22)醯胺、聚氧伸烷基(加成莫耳數2～60)烷基(碳數8～22)醚、聚氧伸烷基改性聚矽氧、胺基改性聚矽氧等。 作為第2纖維層12中所含之纖維處理劑尤佳者為非離子界面活性劑。若於第2纖維層12中大量地調配非離子界面活性劑，則可獲得對纖維表面之附著穩定性之提高、因界面活性劑分子間之偽鍵結所致之功能降低之抑制等效果。尤其，分子量較高之非離子界面活性劑就獲得親水耐久性之方面而言更佳。又，作為易於將纖維處理劑固定於纖維表面之方法，除界面活性劑以外，使用固定劑或混練等方法就提高親水耐久性之方面而言亦較佳。於第2纖維層12中所含之纖維處理劑中亦可添加改性聚矽氧等抗膠著劑等處理劑。於第2纖維層12中，纖維處理劑對纖維之附著量、或附著之方法可設為與對第1纖維層11中所含之熱熔合性纖維進行之利用纖維處理劑之處理相同。 [表面片材1之製造方法] 吸收性物品用之表面片材1為積層不織布，更具體而言為包含具有附著有含有上述(A)成分、(B)成分及(C)成分之纖維處理劑之熱熔合性纖維的第1纖維層11、以及積層於該第1纖維層11之單面之第2纖維層12的積層不織布。表面片材1之製造方法包括如下步驟：將第1纖維層11與第2纖維層12局部地接合而形成積層體；及親水度降低步驟，其係藉由第1纖維層11之熱熔合性纖維之熔點以上之溫度下之熱處理，使第1纖維層11之親水度降低。 圖12中表示良好地用以製造表面片材1之製造裝置。該圖所示之製造裝置100具備第1纖維網製造部110、第2纖維網製造部120、第1加熱部130、壓紋部140、及第2加熱部150。 第1纖維網製造部110及第2纖維網製造部120均包括梳棉機，進行疏棉步驟。第1纖維網製造部110係製造與目標之積層不織布(熱風不織布)之第1纖維層11對應之纖維網之部位。另一方面，第2纖維網製造部120係製造與目標之表面片材1之第2纖維層12對應之纖維網之部位。對應於目標之表面片材之具體用途而向第1纖維網製造部110及第2纖維網製造部120供給適當之原料纖維，製造第1纖維網111及第2纖維網121。對應於目標之積層不織布之具體用途，於原料纖維附著有適當量之纖維處理劑。 自第1纖維網製造部110沿圖中MD所示之方向陸續送出之第1纖維網111被搬送至第1加熱部130，供於親水度降低步驟。於親水度降低步驟中，第1纖維網111由第1加熱部130實施熱風之吹送處理，藉此構成第1纖維網111之纖維彼此發生熱熔合，成為第1不織布112。 第1加熱部130具有密閉之腔室131。於腔室131內配置有環繞之環形皮帶(未圖示)。腔室131內之環形皮帶為透氣性材料，例如包含由金屬線或樹脂所構成之網帶。第1纖維網111係載置於腔室131內之環形皮帶上而被搬送。此處，將第1纖維網111中與腔室131內之環形皮帶之對向面稱為第1面1S，將位於該第1面111a之相反側之面稱為第2面2S。於腔室131內設置有加熱至高於構成第1纖維網111之熱熔合性纖維之熔點之溫度之空氣(以下亦稱為「熱風」)的吹出口(未圖示)。進而，於腔室131內亦設置有吹出之熱風之抽吸口(未圖示)。於搬送至腔室131內之第1纖維網111通過該腔室131內之期間，熱風HW以熱風方式對第1纖維網111進行吹送。熱風HW之吹送係自第1纖維網111之第2面2S側進行。所吹送之熱風HW係自第1纖維網111之第1面1S側放出。為了達到該目的，上述吹出口(未圖示)以與第1纖維網111之第2面2S對向之方式配置，且上述抽吸口(未圖示)以與第1面1S對向之方式配置。 如上所述，於附著有含有(A)成分至(C)成分之纖維處理劑之熱熔合性纖維中，對應於該熱熔合性纖維所受到之熱量，纖維處理劑向纖維內部之滲透程度不同，該熱量變得越大，則纖維處理劑向纖維內部之滲透程度變得越大。而且，纖維處理劑之滲透程度變得越大，則與附著有纖維處理劑之初期狀態相比，纖維之親水度越降低。於本實施態樣之製造方法中，利用該現象，使目標之積層不織布(相當於第1纖維層之第1不織布)產生親水度之梯度，可獲得以親水度自第2面側朝向第1面側變高之方式具有梯度之表面片材。 詳細而言，根據熱風法，存在於第1纖維網111之熱風吹送面即第2面2S之纖維受到最大之熱量，且存在於熱風吹送面之相反側、即與腔室131內之上述環形皮帶之對向面即第1面1S之纖維受到最小之熱量。因此，於本製造方法之第1加熱部130中，存在於第1纖維網111之第2面2S之表面之纖維受到最大之熱量，存在於第1面1S之表面之纖維受到最小之熱量。其結果為，於藉由對第1纖維網111實施熱風吹送處理而獲得之第1不織布112中，受到最大熱量之第2面2S側之纖維處理劑之滲透程度最大，受到最小熱量之第1面1S側之纖維處理劑之滲透程度最小，自第1面1S側朝向第2面2S側，纖維處理劑向纖維內部之滲透程度變大。因此，於第1不織布112中，第1面1S側成為親水度相對較高之高親水性部HP，第2面2S側成為親水度相對較低之低親水性部LP。 第1不織布112進而如後所述般與第2纖維網121積層，於壓紋部140中經過壓紋步驟後，於第2加熱部150中供於熱收縮步驟。於第2加熱部150中，以存在於第2纖維網121之第1面之表面之纖維受到最大之熱量之方式設定，於第1不織布112中，存在於低親水性部LP之纖維較存在於高親水性部HP之纖維受到更大之熱量。因此，經過熱收縮步驟後之第1不織布112具有較剛經過親水度降低步驟後之第1不織布112大之親水度梯度。 於親水度降低步驟中，關於熱處理溫度，就使第1纖維網111或第1不織布112內產生親水度梯度之觀點、及構成第1纖維網111之熱熔合性纖維發生熔合而確保第1不織布112之強度之觀點而言，較佳為127℃以上，更佳為133℃以上，進而較佳為136℃以上，且就第1不織布112之質地之觀點而言，較佳為145℃以下，更佳為140℃以下，進而較佳為138℃以下。又，就相同之觀點而言，熱處理時間於上述溫度下，較佳為3秒以上，更佳為5秒以上，進而較佳為7秒以上，且較佳為14秒以下，更佳為12秒以下，進而較佳為10秒以下。 自第2纖維網製造部120沿圖中MD所示之方向陸續送出之第2纖維網121與第1不織布112重疊，於壓紋部140中供於壓紋步驟。壓紋步驟中，將第1不織布112與第2纖維網121局部地接合而形成積層體101A。第2纖維網121亦與第1纖維網111及第1不織布112同樣地，具有面向搬送該等之皮帶之第1面1S及位於第1面1S之相反側之第2面2S。以第2纖維網121之第2面2S與第1不織布112之低親水性部LP對向之方式於第2纖維網121上配置並重疊第1不織布112。壓紋部140例如可包括凹凸輥141及砧輥142。凹凸輥141之凸部係與具有上述之中間接合部61及其他接合部62之熔接部6之形狀對應。壓紋部140之壓紋加工條件只要為第1不織布112與第2纖維網121之構成纖維彼此於加熱下加壓，形成利用壓紋熔合之熔接部6(參照圖3)之條件即可。再者，第2纖維網121於重疊於第1不織布112之前亦可以不織布之形式形成。即，可代替上述第2纖維網121而於第1不織布112重疊第2不織布122而供於壓紋步驟。 於壓紋部140中將第1不織布112與第2纖維網121局部地接合而一體化而形成之積層體101A被搬送至第2加熱部150，供於熱收縮步驟。第2加熱部150係與第1加熱部130同樣地，具有密閉之腔室151、環形皮帶(未圖示)、配置於積層體101A之第1面1S側之熱風HW之吹出口(未圖示)、及配置於第2面2S側之熱風HW之抽吸口(未圖示)。熱收縮步驟中之熱風HW被加熱至構成第2纖維網121之潛在捲縮性纖維之收縮溫度。 藉由該第2加熱部150之熱處理，如上所述，表現出構成第2纖維網121之潛在捲縮性纖維之螺旋狀之捲縮而產生收縮。積層體101A係將第1不織布112與第2纖維網121以熔接部6局部地接合，因此藉由使第2纖維網121中之潛在捲縮性纖維熱收縮，並使第2纖維網121熱收縮，而使第1不織布112之熔接部6以外之部分朝第2面2S側呈凸狀隆起。藉此，第1不織布112具有自第2纖維網121側朝向第1不織布112側突出之複數個高凸部1b及低凸部1s。如圖4所示，高凸部1b形成於由中間接合部61及其他接合部62包圍之大多邊形區域BT內，低凸部1s形成於由中間接合部61及其他接合部62包圍之小多邊形區域ST內。此處，藉由來自配置於積層體101A之第1面側之吹出口(未圖示)之熱風HW，構成第1不織布112之低親水性部LP之纖維與構成高親水性部HP之纖維相比受到更大之熱量，纖維處理劑向纖維內部之滲透程度進一步變大，纖維之親水度進一步降低。因此，對高凸部1b以通過其頂部1bt之方式於厚度方向Z進行剖面觀察時，高凸部頂部1bu之親水度高於高凸部底部1bd之親水度，對低凸部1s以通過其頂部1st之方式於厚度方向Z進行剖面觀察時，低凸部頂部1su之親水度高於低凸部底部1sd之親水度。 又，由於高凸部1b形成於大多邊形區域BT內，低凸部1s形成於小多邊形區域ST內，故而高凸部1b之頂部1bt較低凸部1s之頂部1st向第2面側隆起，低凸部1s之頂部1st之纖維密度高於高凸部1b之最下部之纖維密度，進而高於高凸部1b之頂部1bt之纖維密度。因此，藉由來自配置於積層體101A之第1面側之吹出口(未圖示)之熱風HW，構成高凸部1b之最下部側之低親水性部LP之纖維與構成低凸部1s之頂部1st側之高親水性部HP之纖維相比，受到更大之熱量，纖維處理劑向纖維內部之滲透程度變大，纖維之親水度降低。因此，低凸部頂部1su之親水度高於高凸部底部1bd之親水度。 於第2加熱部150中，為了使潛在捲縮性纖維可於製造裝置之流動方向、即MD方向上收縮，較佳為使積層體101A之搬送速度變化。具體而言，較佳為使較熱收縮步驟靠上游側、即疏棉步驟至壓紋步驟中之纖維網或積層體等之搬送速度較熱收縮步驟中之積層體101A之搬送速度變快。藉由適當調節該等之搬送速度之差，可控制積層體101A收縮之程度。又，與此同時，藉由使構成第2纖維網121之熱熔合性纖維之一部分相互熱熔合，第2纖維網121成為第2不織布122，製造表面片材1。 又，第2纖維網121並非積層於第1纖維網111，而是積層於第1不織布112後，供於熱收縮步驟。藉此，與積層體101A之整體包含纖維網之情形相比，第1不織布112之相互熔合之纖維成為適度之阻力，潛在捲縮性纖維可於積層體內均勻地收縮。 於熱收縮步驟中，關於熱處理時間，就充分地表現出潛在捲縮性纖維之捲縮而收縮之觀點而言，較佳為6秒以上，更佳為8秒以上，進而較佳為10秒以上，且就第1不織布112及第2不織布122之質地之觀點而言，較佳為20秒以下，更佳為17秒以下，進而較佳為15秒以下。 又，於熱收縮步驟中，關於潛在捲縮性纖維包含聚乙烯及聚丙烯之情形時之熱處理溫度，就收縮起始溫度之觀點而言，較佳為98℃以上，更佳為102℃以上，進而較佳為105℃以上，且就第1不織布112及第2不織布122之質地之觀點而言，較佳為145℃以下，更佳為140℃以下，進而較佳為138℃以下。 構成第2不織布122之纖維之親水度不會因第2加熱部150之熱風而發生變化。由於以構成第2纖維網121之纖維之親水度變得高於構成第1纖維網111之纖維之方式使纖維處理劑附著，故而可獲得於第2不織布122維持親水度最高之狀態下使第1不織布112之親水度具有梯度之積層不織布102A。 如此，表面片材1之製造方法係藉由賦予熱而使賦予有纖維處理劑之熱熔合性纖維之親水度於不織布之厚度方向上局部地降低，藉此表現出親水度之梯度。因此，根據以上之方法，無需重疊複數片不織布而對親水度設置梯度，可沿一片單一之不織布之厚度方向對親水度設置梯度。 以如上方式製造之積層不織布102A係與上述之表面片材1(參照圖3、圖4)基本相同地構成，第1不織布112(第1纖維網111)相當於第1纖維層11，第2不織布122(第2纖維網121)相當於第2纖維層12。如此製造之表面片材1形成為高凸部頂部1bu之親水度高於高凸部底部1bd之親水度，第2纖維層12之親水度高於高凸部頂部1bu之親水度。又，形成為低凸部頂部1su之親水度高於低凸部底部1sd之親水度，第2纖維層12之親水度高於低凸部頂部1su之親水度。若將此種表面片材1用於衛生棉10，則形成為第2纖維層12之親水度高於高凸部頂部1bu及低凸部頂部1su之親水度，因此儘管親水度自頂部側朝向底部側變低，液體亦可順利地自第1纖維層11轉移至第2纖維層12。進而，如上所述，第2纖維層12藉由熱收縮而變得高密度，因此與高於第1纖維層11之親水度相輔相成，將第1纖維層11保持之液體引入至第2纖維層12之性能優異。因此，不易於表面殘留液體，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面，使用感提昇。 以上，對本發明基於其較佳之實施形態進行了說明，但本發明並不限制於上述實施形態。 表面片材1亦可代替如圖3及圖4所示般使圖中之X方向與衛生棉10之縱向一致，使圖中之Y方向與衛生棉10之橫向一致，而使圖中之X方向與衛生棉10之橫向一致，使圖中之Y方向與衛生棉10之縱向一致。 表面片材亦可代替形成有圖4所示之形態之熔接部6之表面片材1，而為以圖13或圖14所示之態樣形成有熔接部6之表面片材1。圖13所示之表面片材之各中間接合部61包括V字狀之雙向延出形狀部61a、倒V字狀之雙向延出形狀部61a、及獨立地配置於該等之中間位置之矩形狀之獨立熔接部61b。圖14所示之表面片材1之各中間接合部61包括V字狀之雙向延出形狀部61a、倒V字狀之雙向延出形狀部61a、及連結該等之與Y方向平行之矩形狀之連結熔接部61c。關於圖13或圖14所示之表面片材1，對與圖4所示之表面片材1相同之構成要素標註相同之符號。 使用本發明之表面片材之吸收性物品除經期衛生棉以外，亦可為衛生護墊(陰道分泌物護墊)、失禁護墊、拋棄式尿布等其他吸收性物品。作為吸收至吸收性物品之體液，可列舉經血、陰道分泌物(vaginal discharge)、軟便、尿、唾液、血液等。 關於上述實施形態，進而揭示以下之吸收性物品用之表面片材。 ＜1＞ 一種吸收性物品用之表面片材，其係具有第1纖維層及積層於其之第2纖維層，且該第1纖維層位於穿著者之肌膚抵接面側者，上述第1纖維層具有自上述第2纖維層側朝向該第1纖維層側突出之複數個高凸部、及高度低於該高凸部之複數個低凸部，該高凸部及該低凸部之內部被構成該第1纖維層之纖維填滿，對上述高凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之高凸部頂部之親水度高於該第1纖維層中之上述第2纖維層側之高凸部底部之親水度，上述第2纖維層之親水度高於該高凸部頂部之親水度。 ＜2＞ 如上述＜1＞所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中對上述低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部之親水度高於該第1纖維層中之上述第2纖維層側之低凸部底部之親水度，該低凸部頂部之親水度高於上述高凸部底部之親水度，上述第2纖維層之親水度高於該低凸部頂部之親水度。 ＜3＞ 如上述＜2＞所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中親水度自上述高凸部頂部朝向上述高凸部底部逐漸變低，且親水度自上述低凸部頂部朝向上述低凸部底部逐漸變低。 ＜4＞ 如上述＜2＞或＜3＞所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部頂部之纖維密度高於上述高凸部頂部之纖維密度，且低於上述第2纖維層之纖維密度。 ＜5＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜4＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第2纖維層係含有熱收縮之熱收縮性纖維之熱收縮纖維層，上述表面片材具備複數個將上述第1纖維層與上述第2纖維層熔接所得之熔接部，上述表面片材具有複數個由複數個上述熔接部包圍之大多邊形區域，該熔接部構成該大多邊形區域之頂點部，上述表面片材具有複數個由複數個構成該大多邊形區域之頂點部之該熔接部包圍且面積小於該大多邊形區域的小多邊形區域，該熔接部亦構成該小多邊形區域之頂點部，於各上述大多邊形區域內配置有上述高凸部，於各上述小多邊形區域內配置有上述低凸部，複數個上述大多邊形區域沿第1方向相互鄰接地配置而構成之大多邊形區域行與複數個上述小多邊形區域沿該第1方向相互鄰接地配置而構成之小多邊形區域行於與該第1方向正交之第2方向上交替地配置。 ＜6＞ 如上述＜5＞所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中相互鄰接之上述大多邊形區域內之上述高凸部與上述小多邊形區域內之上述低凸部係以連結凸部相連，該連結凸部配置於構成上述頂點部之上述熔接部彼此之間且跨及該高凸部與該低凸部而連續地延伸，上述連結凸部之上述第1纖維層自上述第2纖維層側朝向該第1纖維層側低於該低凸部地隆起。 ＜7＞ 如上述＜6＞所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述大多邊形區域形成為由6個上述熔接部包圍之六邊形狀，上述小多邊形區域形成為由4個上述熔接部包圍之四邊形狀，著眼於1個四邊形狀之上述小多邊形區域內之上述低凸部時，4個六邊形狀之上述大多邊形區域內之上述高凸部鄰接，1個該低凸部與4個該高凸部以上述連結凸部相連。 ＜8＞ 如＜1＞至＜7＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第1纖維層具有附著有纖維處理劑之熱熔合性纖維，且上述纖維處理劑含有下述之(A)成分、(B)成分及(C)成分。 (A)聚有機矽氧烷 (B)磷酸烷基酯 (C)下述之通式(1)所表示之陰離子界面活性劑或聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯 [化6](式中，Z表示可含有酯基、醯胺基、胺基、聚氧伸烷基、醚基或雙鍵之碳數1～12之直鏈或支鏈烷基鏈，R1 及R2 分別獨立地表示可含有酯基、醯胺基、聚氧伸烷基、醚基或雙鍵之碳數2～16之直鏈或支鏈烷基，X表示-SO3 M、-OSO3 M或-COOM，M表示H、Na、K、Mg、Ca或銨) ＜9＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜8＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中於上述第1纖維層與上述第2纖維層之間不存在其他層。 ＜10＞ 如上述＜5＞至＜9＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述熔接部之面積相對於上述表面片材總面積之比率為5%以上且30%以下，較佳為7%以上且20%以下。 ＜11＞ 如上述＜7＞所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述高凸部係平面形狀為橢圓之凸部，上述低凸部係平面形狀為圓形之凸部。 ＜12＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜11＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述高凸部之厚度方向之頂點之高度為1.0 mm以上且7.0 mm以下，較佳為1.5 mm以上且5.0 mm以下。 ＜13＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜12＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述高凸部之自底面之隆起角度為70°以上且90°以下，較佳為75°以上且85°以下。 ＜14＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜13＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部之厚度方向之頂點之高度為0.4 mm以上且4.5 mm以下，較佳為0.8 mm以上且2.5 mm以下。 ＜15＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜14＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部之自底面之隆起角度為25°以上且70°以下，較佳為30°以上且65°以下。 ＜16＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜15＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部之厚度方向之頂點之纖維密度相對於上述高凸部之厚度方向之頂點之纖維密度的比為1.2倍以上且3.0倍以下，較佳為1.5倍以上且2.5倍以下。 ＜17＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜16＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第1纖維層之厚度為0.5 mm以上且3.0 mm以下。 ＜18＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜17＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第2纖維層之厚度為0.5 mm以上且2.0 mm以下。 ＜19＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜18＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述表面片材之基重為20 g/m2 以上且200 g/m2 以下，較佳為50 g/m2 以上且100 g/m2 以下。 ＜20＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜19＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中於上述第1纖維層中，上述高凸部頂部之水之接觸角為65°以上且89°以下，較佳為65°以上且85°以下，尤佳為73°以上且75°以下。 ＜21＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜20＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中於上述第1纖維層中，上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角為75°以上且90°以下，較佳為80°以上且88°以下，尤佳為85°以上且86°以下。 ＜22＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜21＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角與上述高凸部頂部之水之接觸角之差為1°以上且20°以下，較佳為5°以上且18°以下，尤佳為7°以上且15°以下。 ＜23＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜22＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中高凸部頂部之水之接觸角相對於上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角之比為0.7以上且0.95以下，較佳為0.75以上且0.85以下，尤佳為0.8以上且0.85以下。 ＜24＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜23＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，於上述第1纖維層中，上述低凸部頂部之水之接觸角為65°以上且89°以下，較佳為70°以上且85°以下，尤佳為73°以上且75°以下。 ＜25＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜24＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之上述第2纖維層側之低凸部底部，於上述第1纖維層中，上述低凸部底部之水之接觸角為75°以上且90°以下，較佳為80°以上且88°以下，尤佳為85°以上且86°以下。 ＜26＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜25＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部及上述第2纖維層側之低凸部底部，且上述低凸部底部之水之接觸角與上述低凸部頂部之水之接觸角之差為1°以上且20°以下、5°以上且18°以下、7°以上且15°以下。 ＜27＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜26＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部及上述第2纖維層側之低凸部底部，上述低凸部頂部之水之接觸角相對於上述低凸部底部之水之接觸角之比為0.7以上且0.95以下，較佳為0.75以上且0.9以下，尤佳為0.80以上且0.85以下。 ＜28＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜27＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角與上述低凸部頂部之水之接觸角之差為1°以上且20°以下，較佳為5°以上且18°以下，尤佳為7°以上且15°以下。 ＜29＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜28＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，上述低凸部頂部之接觸角相對於上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角之比為0.7以上且0.9以下，較佳為0.75以上且0.88以下，尤佳為0.8以上且0.85以下。 ＜30＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜29＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第2纖維層之水之接觸角為50°以上且70°以下，較佳為55°以上且65°以下，尤佳為57°以上且60°以下。 ＜31＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜30＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，第2纖維層之水之接觸角相對於上述高凸部頂部及上述低凸部頂部中水之接觸角較小之部位之接觸角的比為0.65以上且0.95以下，較佳為0.7以上且0.9以下，尤佳為0.75以上且0.85以下。 ＜32＞ 如上述＜1＞至＜31＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，第2纖維層之水之接觸角相對於上述高凸部頂部及上述低凸部頂部中水之接觸角較大之部位之接觸角的比為0.55以上且0.85以下，較佳為0.6以上且0.8以下，尤佳為0.65以上且0.75以下。 ＜33＞ 一種吸收性物品，其使用如上述＜1＞至＜32＞中任一項所記載之表面片材，且於上述表面片材之第2纖維層側具備吸收體。 ＜34＞ 如上述＜33＞所記載之吸收性物品，其中上述吸收性物品具有與穿著者之前後方向對應之縱向及與該縱向正交之橫向，上述表面片材具有複數個由複數個上述熔接部包圍之大多邊形區域，該熔接部構成該大多邊形區域之頂點部，上述表面片材具有複數個由複數個構成該大多邊形區域之頂點部之該熔接部包圍且面積小於該大多邊形區域的小多邊形區域，該熔接部亦構成該小多邊形區域之頂點部，上述大多邊形行及上述小多邊形行分別於該橫向上延伸，且於縱向上交替地排列。 ＜35＞ 如上述＜34＞所記載之吸收性物品，其中上述小多邊形行中之相鄰之上述小多邊形區域間之距離短於位於縱向上最接近之位置之小多邊形區域間之距離。 ＜36＞ 如上述＜34＞或＜35＞所記載之吸收性物品，其中上述吸收性物品於上述縱向上具備中央部、位於較該中央部靠穿著者之前側之前方部、及位於較該中央部靠穿著者之後側之後方部，將上述表面片材及上述吸收體一體地壓縮而成之弧上之壓縮槽於縱向上延伸而自上述前方部跨及上述後方部地延伸。 ＜37＞ 如上述＜33＞至＜36＞中任一項所記載之吸收性物品，其為經期衛生棉。 [實施例] 以下，藉由實施例進而詳細地說明本發明。但是，本發明之範圍並不限制於該實施例。若無特別說明，則「%」係指「質量%」。 [實施例1] (1)構成第1纖維層11(第1纖維網)之熱熔合性纖維 其係芯為聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯、鞘為聚乙烯之同心型芯鞘型複合纖維，芯與鞘之質量比為芯：鞘＝50：50，纖度為2.4 dtex，纖維長度為51 mm。 將上述(1)之熱熔合性纖維浸漬於下述組成之纖維處理劑(油劑)I中。浸漬後使其乾燥，獲得附著有纖維處理劑之熱熔合性芯鞘型複合纖維。對纖維之油劑附著量為0.39質量%。 纖維處理劑(油劑)I之組成 ・聚有機矽氧烷(上述(A)成分，Shin-Etsu Silicones製造之聚矽氧「KM-903」)：8.3質量% 再者，聚矽氧「KM-903」之組成如下所述。重量平均分子量約為50萬之聚二甲基矽氧烷18質量%，重量平均分子量約為2萬之聚二甲基矽氧烷42質量%，分散劑5質量%，水35質量% ・磷酸烷基酯鉀鹽[上述(B)成分，花王股份有限公司製造，Gripper4131之氫氧化鉀中和物]：22.9質量% ・磺基丁二酸二烷基酯鈉鹽[上述(C)成分，花王股份有限公司製造，Pelex OT-P]：9.2質量% ・烷基(硬脂基)甜菜鹼[上述(A)～(C)以外之成分，花王股份有限公司製造，Amphitol 86B]：13.8質量% ・聚氧乙烯(加成莫耳數：2)硬脂基醯胺[上述(A)～(C)以外之成分，Kawaken Fine Chemicals製造，Amisol SDE]：27.5質量% ・聚氧乙烯(POE)、聚氧丙烯(POP)改性聚矽氧[上述(A)～(C)以外之成分，信越化學工業股份有限公司製造，X-22-4515]：18.3質量% 附著於纖維之(A)成分之調配量係上述「KM-903」之組成中僅聚矽氧之調配量，並非「KM-903」整體之調配量。於實施例1中，附著於第1纖維層之熱熔合性纖維之(A)成分之調配量為5.0%。 同樣地，關於(B)成分及(C)成分，上述纖維處理劑中所含之僅除水等以外之各成分之調配量係(B)成分為23.8%、(C)成分為9.5%。 (2)構成第2纖維層12(第2纖維網)之潛在捲縮性纖維(熱收縮性纖維) 其係一側為聚丙烯、另一側為聚乙烯之並列型複合纖維，各樹脂之體積比為50：50，纖度為2.3 dtex，纖維長度為51 mm。芯之樹脂之熔點＋10℃下之熱收縮率為9.5%。 將上述(2)之潛在捲縮性纖維浸漬於公知之纖維處理劑(油劑)中。 不織布之製造 使用(1)及(2)中獲得之纖維，使用圖12所示之製造裝置100，製造圖3及圖4所示之表面片材1。具體而言，首先，於親水度降低步驟中，自第2面側對使用第1纖維網製造部形成之第1纖維網吹送熱風，獲得第1不織布(第1纖維層11)。繼而，於使用第2纖維網製造部形成之第2纖維網上配置第1不織布而獲得積層體，對該積層體實施壓紋加工而將該第1不織布與該第2纖維網局部地接合。其次，於熱收縮步驟中，自該積層體之第1面側(第2纖維網側)吹送熱風，將第2纖維網作為第2不織布(第2纖維層)，獲得凹凸形狀之積層不織布。 上述壓紋加工所使用之凹凸輥141之凸部之形狀係與表面片材1之具有中間接合部61及其他接合部62之熔接部6之形狀對應。如圖4所示，所獲得之不織布中，複數個大多邊形區域BT沿Y方向相互鄰接地配置而成之大多邊形區域行BTL與複數個小多邊形區域ST沿Y方向相互鄰接地配置而成之小多邊形區域行STL於X方向上交替地配置。熔接部6包含中間接合部61及其他接合部62。中間接合部61為具備4根突出部之X字形狀，其他接合部62為具備3根突出部之Y字形狀。熔接部6之形狀為X字形狀之中間接合部61與Y字形狀之其他接合部62之組合，對如上所述般實施壓紋加工而將第1不織布與第2纖維網局部地接合之積層體，使110℃±10℃之熱風通過5～10秒，使第2纖維網之熱收縮性纖維捲縮。使第2纖維層12收縮，並且使第1纖維層11呈凸狀突出，製造具有多個立體圓頂構造之高凸部1b、低凸部1s之表面片材。熔接部6以6個/cm2 配置，熱收縮後之表面片材之位於Y方向之相鄰之2個熔接部6之最接近之間隔為1.1 mm，中間接合部61之平均面積為2.3 mm2 ，其他接合部62之平均面積為1.6 mm2 。又，X字形狀之中間接合部61之4根突出部及Y字形狀之其他接合部62之3根突出部為相同之0.85 mm。又，高凸部31之高度hb為2.3 mm，低凸部32之高度hs為1.5 mm。又，構成中間接合部61之突出部彼此之交叉角度θ1為90°，構成其他接合部62之突出部彼此之交叉角度θ2為130°。 [比較例1] 變更上述壓紋加工所使用之凹凸輥141之凸部之形狀及附著於構成第1纖維層11(第1纖維網)之熱熔合性纖維之纖維處理劑(油劑)，除此以外，以與實施例1之表面片材相同之方式獲得比較例1之表面片材。首先，熔接部僅由圓形狀之接合部所構成，於所獲得之表面片材中，於X方向及Y方向上均等地配置有圓形狀之熔接部。圓形狀之熔接部以7.1個/cm2 配置，熱收縮後之表面片材之位於Y方向之相鄰之2個熔接部之最接近之間隔為1.6 mm，圓形狀之熔接部之平均面積為3.2 mm2 。於比較例1之表面片材，於X方向及Y方向上均等地配置有1種高度之立體圓頂構造之凸部。該凸部之高度為2.3 mm。 又，第1纖維層11(第1纖維網)使用浸漬於纖維處理劑(油劑)III之熱熔合性纖維。浸漬後使其乾燥，獲得附著有纖維處理劑之熱熔合性芯鞘型複合纖維。對纖維之油劑之附著量為0.39質量%。再者，纖維處理劑III係自纖維處理劑I中去除(A)成分者。 [比較例2] 變更上述壓紋加工所使用之凹凸輥141之凸部之形狀，除此以外，以與實施例1之表面片材相同之方式獲得比較例1之表面片材。熔接部僅由圓形狀之接合部所構成，於所獲得之表面片材中，於X方向及Y方向上均等地配置有圓形狀之熔接部。圓形狀之熔接部以7.1個/cm2 配置，熱收縮後之表面片材之位於Y方向之相鄰之2個熔接部之最接近之間隔為1.6 mm，圓形狀之熔接部之平均面積為3.2 mm2 。於比較例1之表面片材，於X方向及Y方向上均等地配置有1種高度之立體圓頂構造之凸部。該凸部之高度為2.3 mm。 [性能評價] 關於實施例1、比較例1～2之各表面片材，藉由上述接觸角之測定方法測定第1纖維層之各部位之接觸角、及第2纖維層之接觸角。具體而言，關於實施例1之表面片材，測定高凸部頂部1bu之接觸角、高凸部底部1bd之接觸角、低凸部頂部1su之接觸角、低凸部底部1sd之接觸角、及第2纖維層12之接觸角。關於比較例1～2之各表面片材，測定凸部頂部之接觸角、凸部底部之接觸角、及第2纖維層12之接觸角。又，關於實施例1、比較例1～2之各表面片材，依照下述方法評價表面回液量、及表面液體殘餘量。評價環境為室溫20℃、濕度60%RH。將其等之結果示於下述表1。 [液體吸取殘存量之測定] 將實施例1及比較例1～2中獲得之各表面片材切出60 mm(CD方向)×80 mm(MD方向)之大小，並經由熱熔接著劑將各者接著於同形同大之吸收片材(紙漿200 g/m2 及吸收性聚合物50 g/m2 )上，獲得評價用樣品。再者，各表面片材係將第1纖維層側朝向穿著者之肌膚抵接面側配置。 其次，於壓克力板之水平且平滑之表面上滴加預先將黏度調整為8±0.1 cP之脫纖維馬血1.0 g後，於該滴加部分將上述樣品以其不織布側(表面片材側)與該脫纖維馬血接觸之方式重疊，進而，於該樣品上重疊重石(壓克力板)，對該樣品施加0.36 g/m2 之荷重。重疊重石後60秒後將該重石及樣品卸除，測定殘存於壓克力板之表面上之脫纖維馬血之量。殘存於該壓克力板之表面之脫纖維馬血之量之測定係使用市售之衛生紙以如下方式進行。即，利用預先已測定重量之衛生紙吸收殘存於壓克力板之表面之脫纖維馬血，測定吸收後之該衛生紙之重量。藉由自吸收脫纖維馬血後之衛生紙之重量減去預先測定之吸收脫纖維馬血前之衛生紙之重量，而求出殘存於壓克力板之表面之脫纖維馬血之量(mg)。將以上之操作進行3次，將該3次之平均值作為液體吸取殘存量。液體吸取殘存量係成為液體之引入性之指標者，液體吸取殘存量越少，液體之引入性越高，可評價為吸液性越優異。將其結果示於下述表1。再者，脫纖維馬血之黏度調整係調整Nippon Bio-test Laboratories股份有限公司製造之脫纖維馬血之血球、血漿比率而進行，黏度係使用B型黏度計(東機產業股份有限公司製造 型號TVB-10M，測定條件：轉子No.19，30 rpm，25℃，60秒)進行測定。 [表面回液量之評價] 將實施例1及比較例1～2中獲得之各表面片材切出60 mm(CD方向)×80 mm(MD方向)之大小，經由熱熔接著劑將各者接著於同形同大之吸收片材(紙漿200 g/m2 及吸收性聚合物50 g/m2 )上，獲得評價用樣品。再者，各表面片材係將第1纖維層側朝向穿著者之肌膚抵接面側而配置。 其次，將評價用樣品水平放置，於該樣品重疊具備底部附有直徑1 cm之注入口之圓筒的壓克力板，自注入口逐一注入3.0 g之預先將黏度調整為40±0.1 cP(假定經期前半等可見之黏度較高之經血)之脫纖維馬血，合計注入6.0 g，注入後保持該狀態1分鐘。再者，脫纖維馬血之黏度調整係以與[液體吸取殘存量之測定]相同之方式進行。 其次，卸除具備圓筒之壓克力板，於表面片材之肌膚抵接面側表面上重疊地載置16張縱6 cm×橫9.5 cm且基重為13 g/m2 之吸收紙(市售之衛生紙)。進而，於其上以壓力成為4.0×102 Pa之方式載置重物並加壓5秒。加壓後，取出吸收紙，測定加壓前後之紙之重量，藉由子加壓後之紙之重量減去加壓前預先測定之紙之重量，而測得被紙所吸收之脫纖維馬血之重量，作為表面回液量。將以上之操作進行3次，將3次之平均值作為回液量(mg)，回液量越少，越不易產生回液，評價越高。將其結果示於下述表1。 同樣地，於每3分鐘逐一流入3.0 g之脫纖維馬血，合計流入9.0 g之條件下亦測定回液量(mg)，將其結果示於下述表1。 [表1] 由表1所示之結果可知，使用實施例1之表面片材之樣品與使用比較例1～2之表面片材之樣品相比，回液量最低，表示不易於樣品表面殘留液體。又，使用實施例1之表面片材之樣品與使用比較例2之表面片材之樣品相比，液體吸取殘存量較低，表示液體之引入性較高。因此，使用實施例1之表面片材之經期衛生棉不易於經期衛生棉表面殘留液體，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面，可期待使用感之提昇。 [產業上之可利用性] 根據本發明，進一步減小與穿著者之肌膚之接觸面積，並且不易於表面殘留液體，一經吸收之液體不易返回至表面，使用感提昇。According to the surface sheet described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult for liquid to remain on the surface and it is difficult to return the liquid once absorbed to the surface, so the feeling of use is improved. However, there is a need for a surface sheet that further reduces the contact area with the wearer's skin, and that the surface does not easily retain liquid, and once absorbed, the liquid cannot easily return to the surface. In addition, Patent Document 1 does not describe anything including two types of convex portions. Also, there is no description or suggestion regarding the hydrophilicity gradient when focusing on the high convex parts of the wearer's skin, which are easily contacted by the two convex parts. In addition, according to the surface sheet described in Patent Document 2, the contact area with the wearer's skin can be further reduced, and the sticky feeling or moist feeling can be further reduced, and the use feeling can be improved. However, Patent Document 2 does not describe any liquid residual property on the surface. In addition, Patent Document 2 does not make any description or suggestion regarding the gradient of hydrophilicity when focusing on the high convex portions of the two convex portions that easily contact the wearer's skin. Therefore, the present invention relates to a surface sheet for an absorbent article which can solve the disadvantages of the aforementioned prior art. Hereinafter, the surface sheet 1 for the absorbent article of the present invention based on its preferred embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the surface sheet 1) will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIGS. 1-3, the surface sheet 1 of this embodiment is a laminated nonwoven fabric which has the multilayer structure of the 1st fiber layer 11 and the 2nd fiber layer 12 laminated | stacked on it. The surface sheet 1 is a user such that the first fiber layer 11 is positioned on the skin contact surface side of the wearer. The X direction in the figure is the second direction, and is the same direction as the machine direction (MD (machine direction) direction) and the longitudinal direction of the sanitary napkin 10. The Y direction in the figure is the first direction orthogonal to the second direction, and is the direction orthogonal to the machine direction (MD direction) (CD direction (cross direction)) and the transverse direction of the tampon 10. Same direction. The Z direction in the figure is the thickness direction. Moreover, the longitudinal direction of the tampon 10 is a direction corresponding to the front-back direction of the wearer when worn. 1 and 2 show a menstrual tampon 10 using a surface sheet 1. Menstrual tampon 10 (hereinafter also referred to as sanitary napkin 10) includes a surface sheet 1 disposed on the skin abutting surface side, a back sheet 2 disposed on a non-skin abutting surface side 2, and two sheets 1 The long absorbent body 3 in the longitudinal direction X between the two. The sanitary napkin 10 is provided with a pair of side sheets 4 and 4 on both sides 10s and 10s along the longitudinal direction X, and a pair of side flaps 5 and 5 extending outward in the lateral direction Y are formed. As shown in FIG. 1, the sanitary napkin 10 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line CL extending in the longitudinal direction X. In addition, in this specification, the "skin abutment surface" refers to the surface disposed on the skin side of the wearer when worn on both the front and back surfaces of the components such as the surface sheet 1 of the sanitary napkin 10, and the "non-skin "Abutment surface" means the surface facing the wearer's skin on the opposite side of the front and back surfaces of each member such as the surface sheet 1 when worn. If the tampon 10 is described in detail, as shown in FIG. 1, the tampon 10 is divided into: a central part A, which is a region where the side wings 5 and 5 are arranged; and a front part B, which is worn when the menstrual tampon 10 is worn. It is arranged on the ventral side of the wearer more than the central part A; and the rear part C is arranged on the back side of the wearer more than the central part A when the sanitary napkin 10 is worn. When wearing the tampon 10, the central portion A usually includes a portion arranged to face the excretory portion (such as the vaginal opening) of the wearer. In other words, the side flap portion 5 is formed in a longitudinal area of the sanitary napkin 10 including the excretion-facing area (the area facing the wearer's excretion portion). As shown in FIG. 2, the top sheet 1 and the back sheet 2 respectively cover the entire surface of the skin abutting surface side and the entire surface of the non-skin abutting surface side of the absorbent body 3, and have a surface extending from the periphery of the absorbent body 3. Extend part. As shown in FIG. 2, the length of the lateral Y of the front sheet 1 is shorter than the length of the lateral Y of the back sheet 2. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a pair of side sheets 4 and 4 are arranged and fixed on the skin abutment surface side of the surface sheet 1 and the side of the surface sheet 1 along the longitudinal direction X, respectively. It has an extended portion extending from the side portion of the surface sheet 1 to the outer side in the lateral direction Y. In the sanitary napkin 10, the outwardly extending part of the lateral Y outside of the back sheet 2 and the outwardly extending part of the lateral Y outside of the side sheet 4 are fixed by bonding, fusing, etc., and the central part A is more than the front part B And the rear part C is extended to the outer side of the lateral direction Y, and the wing part 5 is formed. Apply adhesive to the non-skin abutment surface of the lateral Y central portion of the back sheet 2 of the sanitary napkin 10 and the extension portion of the back sheet 2 of the flanking portion 5 to form a useful adhesive for fixing the sanitary napkin 10 to shorts, etc. The fixing part 5a of an underpants. In addition, each side sheet 4 may be provided with an elastic member fixed in an elongated state in the longitudinal direction X near the end on the inner side of the lateral Y (centerline CL side), and formed by the elastic member when worn. The shrinkage force causes a leak-proof flanging that separates a portion of a specific width from the end portion from the surface sheet 1. Further, an arc-shaped compression groove (not shown) formed by embossing the surface sheet 1 and the absorbent body 3 in the sanitary napkin 10 and integrally compressing them can extend in the longitudinal direction X and span the front portion B and The rear portion C extends. For example, the compression groove (not shown) is preferably formed in an arc shape connected to the front square portion B, both side portions 10s and 10s, and the rear portion C of the sanitary napkin 10. The compression groove (not shown) is formed by compressing the surface sheet 1 and the absorber 3 from the skin contact surface side with or without heat. As the back sheet 2, the absorbent body 3, and the side sheet 4 constituting the sanitary napkin 10, the same ones as those of the previous users in the technical field can be used without particular limitation, respectively. For example, as the back sheet 2, a water-repellent nonwoven fabric having a high water pressure resistance, such as a liquid-impermeable film made of synthetic resin, or a spunbond-meltblown-spunbond layer nonwoven fabric, can be used. As the absorbent body 3, an absorbent core containing particles of an absorbent polymer and an absorbent core of a fibrous material with a toilet paper can be used. As the side sheet 4, a water-repellent nonwoven fabric having high water pressure resistance can be used, and for example, a spunbond-meltblown-spunbond layer nonwoven fabric can be used. The surface sheet 1, the back sheet 2, the absorber 3, and the side sheet 4 can be fixed using adhesives or thermal embossing, ultrasonic embossing, and high-frequency embossing commonly used for absorbent articles such as menstrual cotton. And other fusion methods. The surface sheet 1 constituting one embodiment of the above-mentioned sanitary napkin 10 may be a non-woven fabric other than a hot-air non-woven fabric, but the heat shrinking step described later and the step of thermally fusing the fiber web to form a non-woven fabric may be performed simultaneously. Non-woven fabric is preferred. The so-called "hot air non-woven fabric" refers to a non-woven fabric manufactured through the step of blowing a fluid above 50 ° C, such as gas or water vapor, to a fiber web or non-woven fabric, and its meaning includes not only the non-woven fabric manufactured only in this step, but also Non-woven fabrics made by other methods are non-woven fabrics produced by adding this step or non-woven fabrics produced by performing any step after this step. In addition, the laminated nonwoven fabric of the present invention includes not only a hot-air nonwoven fabric, but also a composite of a hot-air nonwoven fabric and other fibrous sheets or films such as a nonwoven fabric. In the surface sheet 1 which is a laminated non-woven fabric, as shown in FIG. 3, the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 abut and directly contact each other, and the other layers are not interposed between the two layers 11 and 12. The first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 are distinguished based on factors such as the type of materials of the fibers constituting the layers, the thickness of the fibers, the presence or absence of hydrophilization treatment, and the method of forming the layers. If an optical microscope (Keyence Co., Ltd., VHX-1000 digital microscope) is used to enlarge the thickness direction cross section of the surface sheet 1, based on these factors, the boundary portion of the two layers 11, 12 can be observed. In the sanitary napkin 10, the surface sheet 1 is used by arranging the first fiber layer 11 on the skin contact surface side and the second fiber layer 12 on the non-skin contact surface side. That is, the sanitary napkin 10 includes the absorbent body 3 on the second fiber layer 12 side of the surface sheet 1. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 3, the first fiber layer 11 has a plurality of high convex portions 1b protruding from the second fiber layer 12 side toward the first fiber layer 11 side, and the height is lower than the high convex portions 1b. The plurality of low convex portions 1s. Preferably, as shown in FIG. 4, the surface sheet 1 includes a plurality of high convex portions 1 b, a plurality of low convex portions 1 s, and a connecting convex portion 1 c extending continuously across the high convex portions 1 b and the low convex portions 1 s. The connecting convex portion 1c is formed by bulging the first fiber layer 11 from the second fiber layer 12 side toward the first fiber layer 11 side below the low convex portion 1s. The inside of the high convex part 1b and the low convex part 1s is filled with the fiber which comprises the 1st fiber layer 11. Further, the inside of the connecting convex portion 1c is also filled with the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 11. In the surface sheet 1, the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 are both fiber layers including randomly deposited fibers, and do not include a plurality of laminated layers that are further subdivided. In the surface sheet 1, the second fiber layer 12 is a heat-shrinkable fiber layer including heat-shrinkable heat-shrinkable fibers. On the other hand, in the surface sheet 1, the first fiber layer 11 is laminated on the second fiber layer 12 and is a non-heat-shrinkable fiber layer including non-heat-shrinkable fibers. The surface sheet 1 includes a plurality of welding portions 6 that weld the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12. Preferably, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the surface sheet 1 is formed by joining the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 locally by a plurality of welding portions 6 arranged regularly, and bonding the non-skin The heat-shrinkable fibers of the second fiber layer 12 on the contact surface side are formed by heat-shrinking. A plurality of recessed portions are formed on the surface sheet 1 by the welded portion 6 which is embossed from the skin abutment surface side of the first fiber layer 11, and the non-embossed portion is not embossed. A plurality of convex portions are formed. The fiber density of the portion which becomes the recessed portion by the welded portion 6 becomes higher than the portion of the convex portion which is not welded, and becomes highest in the surface sheet 1. The welding portion 6 is formed by various welding methods such as thermal embossing and ultrasonic embossing. The surface sheet 1 has a plurality of large polygonal regions BT surrounded by a plurality of welded portions 6, and the welded portions 6 constitute a vertex portion of the large polygonal region BT. In addition, the surface sheet 1 has a plurality of small polygonal regions ST surrounded by a plurality of welding portions 6 constituting a vertex portion of the large polygonal region BT and having an area smaller than that of the large polygonal region BT. The fusion portion 6 also constitutes a vertex of the small polygonal region ST. unit. In this way, a polygonal region (large polygonal region BT, small polygonal region ST) surrounded by the plurality of welding portions 6 is formed in the surface sheet 1, and the polygonal region (large polygonal region BT, small polygonal region ST) becomes non-compressed. Pattern processing department. Preferably, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the polygonal region has a plurality of large polygonal regions BT having a relatively large area surrounded by a plurality of welded portions 6 as apex portions, and a plurality of adjacent polygonal regions. The welding portion 6 of the vertex portion of the large polygon area BT is surrounded as a common vertex portion and has an area smaller than the plurality of small polygon areas ST of the large polygon area BT. In this manner, the large polygonal region BT and the small polygonal region ST adjacent thereto use the welded portion 6 as a common vertex portion. In addition, in the present specification, the term “the welding portion 6 is used as a vertex portion” or “the welding portion 6 constitutes a vertex” does not mean a limited meaning of the entire welding portion 6 as an apex, and its meaning also includes a part of the welding portion 6 as The apex situation. In the surface sheet 1 of the present embodiment, a part of the welded part 6 becomes the apex of each polygonal region, and the remaining part other than the vertex of the welded part 6 becomes a part of the edge constituting the shape of each of the polygonal regions. In addition, the expression "surrounded by the welded part 6" does not mean a region constituted by the inner side of the welded part 6, but an area including the welded part 6. If described in detail, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, in the surface sheet 1, the large polygonal region BT is surrounded by six welding portions 6 constituting a vertex portion, and the outer shape is a hexagonal shape. On the other hand, the small polygonal area ST is surrounded by the four welding portions 6 constituting the apex portion, and the outer shape is a quadrangular shape. In the first direction, the two adjacent large polygonal areas BT and BT share two of the six welded portions 6 (two other welded portions 62 described later) within the six welded portions 6 constituting each of the large polygonal areas BT, The two welded portions 6 (two other welded portions 62 described later) that are connected to each other are distinguished from each other. In the second direction, two adjacent large polygonal areas BT and BT share one of the six welded portions 6 (the intermediate welded portion 61 described later) within the six welded portions 6 of each of the large polygonal areas BT. The one welded portion 6 (the intermediate joint portion 61 described later) is partitioned from each other. In addition, one small polygonal region ST of a quadrangular shape is surrounded by four large polygonal regions BT of a hexagon. The adjacent small polygonal area ST and the large polygonal areas BT share two welded portions 6 (the intermediate welded portion 61 described later and the welded portion 62 described later) of the six welded portions 6, and the two welded portions 6 (The intermediate joint portion 61 described later and other joint portions 62 described later) are divided from each other. Therefore, in the surface sheet 1, all the four welded portions 6 constituting the small polygonal region ST are shared with the welded portions 6 constituting the four large polygonal regions BT adjacent to the small polygonal region ST. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, a plurality of large polygonal regions BT are formed in which a large polygonal region row BTL is arranged adjacent to each other in the first direction. In the surface sheet 1, a plurality of small polygonal area rows STL are formed in which a plurality of small polygonal areas ST are arranged adjacent to each other in the first direction. The large polygonal area rows BTL and the small polygonal area rows STL are alternately arranged in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. That is, a large polygonal area line BTL, a small polygonal area line STL, and a large polygonal area line BTL are arranged alternately along the second direction. Further, in the sanitary napkin 10, the large polygonal rows BTL and the small polygonal rows STL extend in the transverse direction of the sanitary napkin 10, respectively, and are alternately arranged in the longitudinal direction of the sanitary napkin 10. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, a high convex portion 1 b having a relatively high height is formed in each of the large polygonal regions BT. Further, in the surface sheet 1, a plurality of high convex portions 1b are arranged in the first direction to constitute a high convex portion row 1bL. On the other hand, a low convex portion 1s having a height lower than the high convex portion 1b is formed in each of the small polygonal regions ST. Further, in the surface sheet 1, a plurality of low convex portions 1s are arranged in the first direction to constitute a low convex portion row 1sL. In addition, the high convex row 1bL and the low convex row 1sL are alternately arranged in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. That is, the high convex portion rows 1bL, the low convex portion rows 1sL, and the high convex portion rows 1bL, ... are alternately arranged along the second direction. Further, the high convex portion 1 b of the high convex portion row 1 bL and the low convex portion 1 s of the low convex portion row 1 sL are arranged in a dislocated manner on the surface sheet 1. In other words, the high convex portions 1 b and the low convex portions 1 s are alternately arranged in a direction inclined with respect to each of the first direction and the second direction. If the surface sheet 1 having such a structure is used for sanitary napkin 10 which is an example of an absorbent article, the top 1st of the low convex portion 1s lower than the high convex portion 1b is difficult to contact the wearer's skin during use, which can reduce the The contact area of the wearer's skin. In addition, the liquid excreted during use is easily transferred to the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b in contact with the wearer's skin, and it is not easy for liquid to remain on the surface, which improves the feeling of use. In the sanitary napkin 10, the distance between the adjacent small polygonal regions ST and ST in one small polygonal row STL is shorter than the distance between the small polygonal regions ST and ST located closest to each other in the longitudinal direction X. Therefore, the body fluid is more likely to diffuse in the longitudinal direction X than in the transverse direction Y, and it is easy to suppress the leakage of the body fluid from both sides 10s and 10s of the sanitary napkin 10 in the transverse direction Y. Moreover, in the sanitary napkin 10, the distance between the adjacent large polygonal areas BT and BT in one large polygonal row BTL is shorter than the distance between the large polygonal areas BT and BT located closest to each other in the longitudinal direction X. Therefore, the high convex portion 1b is difficult to incline toward the lateral Y, and it is easy to further suppress the leakage of body fluids from both sides 10s and 10s of the lateral Y of the sanitary napkin 10. In addition, the distance between the polygonal regions herein refers to the distance between the center points of the polygonal regions. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the welding portion 6 is located between the two highly convex portions 1 b and 1 b closest to each other in the second direction and closest to each other in the first direction. The two low convex portions 1s and 1s at the positions each have an intermediate joint portion 61 therebetween. Specifically, in the second direction, the closest two high convex portions 1bL and 1b among the high convex portion rows 1bL and 1bL that are closest to each other are formed between each other, and are located at the most in the second direction. The two low convex portions 1s and 1s closest to each other in the first direction of the low convex portion line 1sL between the high convex portion lines 1bL and 1bL that are close to each other have one intermediate joint portion 61. In the surface sheet 1, the plurality of welding portions 6 include two shapes of bonding portions, the first type is the intermediate bonding portion 61, and the second type is the remaining bonding portions 62 other than the intermediate bonding portion 61. In addition, in the present specification, the term “one joint” refers to the shape of an embossed portion that is regarded as one in appearance. Even if the shape of the embossed portion includes a plurality of dots or dotted lines, it is also referred to as “1 Joints. " In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the quadrangular small polygonal regions ST and ST of each intermediate joint portion 61 adjacent to each other in the first direction are regarded as the four welded portions 6 constituting each small polygonal region ST. One of the welding portions 6 in the inside is shared, and the large polygonal areas BT, BT of hexagons adjacent in the second direction are shared as one of the welding portions 6 in the six welding portions 6 constituting each of the polygonal areas BT. Therefore, each of the intermediate joint portions 61 is disposed at an intermediate position between the two low convex portions 1s and 1s closest to each other in the first direction, and is disposed at an intermediate position between the two high convex portions 1b and 1b closest to each other in the second direction. position. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 7, each intermediate joint portion 61 is provided with a bidirectionally extending shape portion 61a, which is composed of two large polygons which are closest to each other in the second direction. The center point of the vertex portion of the vertex of the region BT extends along the edge forming the outer shape of each of the large polygonal regions BT. As described above, in the surface sheet 1, the large polygonal regions BT and BT adjacent to each other in the second direction have a single vertex portion. Further, in the surface sheet 1, the vertices of the small polygonal regions ST of the quadrangle are all shared with the vertices of the large polygonal region BT adjacent to the hexagon of the small polygonal region ST. Therefore, the adjacent two-way extension shape portions 61a, 61a adjacent to each other in the second direction are connected to each other, and formed into a four-way extension shape, that is, an X shape, that is, the middle joint portion 61 is formed adjacent to each other along the second direction from the vertex. A hexagonal large polygonal region BT extends outside the edge, and extends from the vertex along the edge of the hexagonal large polygonal region BT adjacent to it in the second direction. The X-shaped intermediate joint portion 61 has a shape in which four protruding portions 61e extend from a vertex in a plan view. The four protruding portions 61e are each of the same length, and each of the X-shaped intermediate joint portions 61 is a line parallel to the first direction passing through its center point and a line parallel to the second direction passing through its center point. It has a line symmetrical shape. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 7, regarding the cross angle θ1 between the protrusions 61 e in the second direction of the X-shaped intermediate joint portion 61 in the second direction, the contact area between the surface sheet 1 and the skin is reduced. From the viewpoint of maintaining a good skin feel and making a good appearance impression, it is preferably 50 ° or more, particularly preferably 70 ° or more, and preferably 170 ° or less, particularly preferably 130 ° or less, and more specifically, In other words, it is preferably 50 ° or more and 170 ° or less, and more preferably 70 ° or more and 130 ° or less. In the surface sheet 1, the crossing angle θ1 is 90 °. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 7, each of the other joints 62 is formed in a three-dimensional extension in a small polygonal region ST having a single vertex and two large polygonal regions BT, BT adjacent in the first direction. The shape is a Y-shape, that is, from the vertex which is the center point of the joint along a part of the outer shape of the small polygonal region ST forming a quadrilateral and a part of the outer shape of the large polygonal region BT forming a hexagon, and Extending from a vertex which is the center point of the vertex portion along a portion of the outer shape forming a small polygonal region ST of a quadrilateral and forming a portion of the outer shape of a large polygonal region BT of another hexagon, and along a portion of a hexagon forming a hexagon The large polygonal region BT is part of an outer shape and an edge of a part of the outer polygon of the large polygonal region BT forming another hexagon extends. The Y-shaped other joint portion 62 has a shape in which three protruding portions 62e extend from a vertex which is a center point in a plan view. The three protruding portions 62e are each of the same length, and the other joint portions 62 in a Y-shape have a line-symmetric shape with respect to a line passing through the center point and parallel to the second direction. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 7, regarding the intersection angle θ2 between the protrusions 62 e of the other joint portions 62 in a Y-shape, the contact area between the surface sheet 1 and the skin is reduced and the skin is maintained well. From the viewpoint of feel and good appearance impression, it is preferably 50 ° or more, particularly preferably 70 ° or more, and more preferably 170 ° or less, particularly preferably 130 ° or less, and more specifically, preferably 50 ° to 170 °, and more preferably 70 ° to 130 °. In the surface sheet 1, the crossing angle θ2 is 130 °. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 7, the length of each of the four protrusions 61e of the X-shaped middle joint portion 61 and the three protrusions 62e of the other Y-shaped junction portion 62 is increased. From the viewpoint of the introduction and diffusivity of the liquid of the surface sheet 1, and emotional, it is preferably 0.5 mm or more, more preferably 0.7 mm or more, and preferably 5.0 mm or less, and further preferably 4.0 mm. Hereinafter, more specifically, it is preferably 0.5 mm or more and 5.0 mm or less, and still more preferably 0.7 mm or more and 4.0 mm or less. Further, the lengths of the four protruding portions 61e of the intermediate joint portion 61 from the vertex which is the center point of the vertex portion in the surface sheet 1 are the same length as each other. On the other hand, the lengths of the three protruding portions 62e of the other joint portions 62 from the apex (the center point of the apex portion) in the surface sheet 1 are the same as each other. However, the length is not limited to this form, and may be different. For example, two of the three protruding portions 62e of the other joint portions 62 may have the same length, and one of them may be shorter than the other two. In addition, one of the protrusions 62e among the three protrusions 62e of the other joining portions 62 is arranged parallel to the second direction (X direction) in the surface sheet 1. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 7, regarding each of the welding portions 6 (the intermediate joint portion 61 and the other joint portions 62), a good skin touch is maintained and the liquid introduction and diffusion of the surface sheet 1 are improved. From the viewpoint of performance, the area of one welded portion 6 (average of the intermediate joint portion 61 and the other joint portions 62) is preferably 1 mm.2 Above, and further preferably 1.5 mm2 Above, and preferably 15 mm2 Below, more preferably 12 mm2 Hereinafter, more specifically, it is preferably 1 mm.2 Above 15 mm2 Below, more preferably 1.5 mm2 Above 12 mm2 the following. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 5, each of the welded portions 6 (the intermediate joint portion 61 and the other joint portions 62) are regularly and spaced apart from each other in the first direction and the second direction, and are provided individually and independently. The density of each welding portion 6 (intermediate joining portion 61 and other joining portions 62) is preferably one from the viewpoint of improving the introduction and diffusion of the liquid of the surface sheet 1 and maintaining a good skin feel. / cm2 Above, further preferably 2 pieces / cm2 Above, and preferably 32 pcs / cm2 Hereinafter, it is more preferably 16 pieces / cm2 Hereinafter, more specifically, it is preferably 1 piece / cm.2 Above 32 pcs / cm2 Hereinafter, it is more preferably 2 pieces / cm2 Above and 16 pcs / cm2 the following. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 5, the distance between the welding portions 6 (the intermediate joint portion 61 and other joint portions 62) located closest to each other in the first direction increases the liquid content of the surface sheet 1. From the viewpoints of introductory and diffusive properties, and good appearance impression and skin feel, it is preferably 0.5 mm or more, further preferably 1.0 mm or more, and preferably 5.0 mm or less, and more preferably 4.0 mm or less, more specifically, 0.5 mm or more and 5.0 mm or less, and further preferably 1.0 mm or more and 4.0 mm or less. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 7, one hexagonal large polygonal region BT is formed by two intermediate joint portions 61 and four other joint portions 62. The two intermediate joints 61 are arranged on an imaginary bisector line Ly1 extending in parallel with the second direction through the center of gravity of the large polygonal region BT in a plan view, and are opposite to the first The imaginary bisectors Lx1 extending in parallel directions are arranged symmetrically. The four other joining portions 62 are arranged at the vertex portions of the large polygonal region BT other than the vertex portions of the two intermediate joining portions 61. The two other joint portions 62, 62 closest to each other in the first direction are arranged in a symmetrical manner with respect to an imaginary bisector Ly1 extending parallel to the second direction in a plan view. The two other joint portions 62 and 62 closest to each other in the second direction are arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary bisector Lx1 extending parallel to the first direction in a plan view. In this way, the two other joints 62, 62 closest to each other in the X direction constituting one hexagonal large polygonal region BT are arranged so as to be opposite to each other with respect to the imaginary bisector Lx1. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 8, one quadrangular small polygonal region ST is formed by two intermediate joint portions 61 and two other joint portions 62. The two intermediate joints 61 are arranged on the imaginary bisector Lx2 extending in parallel with the first direction through the center of gravity of the small polygonal region ST in a plan view, and with respect to the second center of gravity with the center of gravity passing through the small polygonal region ST The imaginary bisector Ly2 extending in parallel directions is arranged symmetrically. The two other joints 62 are arranged on the imaginary bisector Ly2 extending parallel to the second direction in a plan view, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the imaginary bisector Lx2 extending parallel to the first direction. . In this way, the two other joints 62, 62 closest to each other in the X direction constituting a small quadrangular polygonal area ST are arranged in a Y shape and inverted Y so as to be opposite to each other with respect to the imaginary bisector Lx2. Word shape. As described above, in the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the vertices of each of the small polygonal regions ST of the quadrangle and the vertices of the large polygonal region BT adjacent to the hexagon of the small polygonal region ST are all Ministry shares. Therefore, in the second direction, the rows of the other Y-shaped joints 62 and the other Y-shaped other joints 62 are arranged at regular intervals in the first direction in the Y-shaped joints 62 in the first direction. Between rows of other joints 62 of inverted Y-shape arranged at equal intervals in the first direction, X-shaped intermediate joints 61 are arranged at regular intervals in the first direction. Trip 61. Such an array including three joints is arranged at regular intervals in the second direction. In the first direction, an X-shaped intermediate joint portion 61 is disposed at a position corresponding to the middle of the two other Y-shaped joint portions 62 and 62 closest to each other in the first direction. In the second direction, the other joint portions 62 of the Y-shape adjacent to the second direction and the other joint portions 62 of the inverted Y-shape are arranged on an imaginary line extending parallel to the second direction. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 3, the constituent fibers of the surface sheet 1 of the welded portion 6 (the intermediate joint portion 61 and the other joint portions 62) are compacted, compared with a portion not embossed. , The height (thickness) of the surface sheet 1 becomes the lowest (thin). That is, the fiber density of the recessed portion formed by the welded portion 6 (the intermediate joint portion 61 and the other joint portion 62) is higher than that of the unembossed portion, and becomes the highest in the surface sheet 1. In addition, depending on the embossing processing conditions, the constituent fibers may be melt-solidified to form a film. Accordingly, the welded portion 6 (the intermediate joint portion 61 and the other joint portions 62) affects the hardness of the surface sheet 1 or the introduction of excretion liquid. From this viewpoint, the ratio of the area of the welded portion 6 to the total area of the surface sheet, that is, the embossing rate is preferably 5% or more and 30% or less, and particularly preferably 7% or more and 20% or less. According to the embossing pattern of the surface sheet 1, even if such a low embossing rate is set, the contact area with the wearer's skin can be reduced. In the surface sheet 1 formed as described above, as shown in FIG. 5, the planar shape of the high convex portion 1 b formed in the large polygonal region BT of the hexagon is an elliptical convex portion, and each small polygon formed in the quadrangle is formed. The planar shape of the low convex portion 1s in the region ST becomes a circular convex portion. Further, a connecting convex portion 1c is formed between each of the high convex portion 1b formed in the large polygon area BT and the low convex portion 1s formed in the four small polygon areas ST adjacent to the large polygon area BT. In the surface sheet 1, as described above, as shown in FIG. 4, one small polygonal region ST of a quadrangle is surrounded by four large polygonal regions BT of a hexagon. Focusing on the low convex portion 1s in one small polygonal region ST having a quadrangular shape, the high convex portion 1b in the large polygonal region BT having four hexagonal shapes is adjacent to each other. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the low convex portion 1s in one small polygonal area ST adjacent to the high convex portion 1b in the four large polygonal areas BT are connected by a connecting convex portion 1c, and the connecting convex portion 1c is arranged. The welding portions 6 and 6 between the apex portions constituting the polygonal region are specifically disposed between the intermediate joint portion 61 and the other joint portions 62. The inside of the connecting convex portion 1c is a liquid passage R through which liquid moves from the high convex portion 1b toward the low convex portion 1s. When the surface sheet 1 having such a structure is used for a sanitary napkin 10 which is an example of an absorbent article, even if a large amount of liquid is introduced into the high convex portion 1b, it is easy to exert the liquid through the connecting convex portion 1c serving as the liquid flow path R. The function within the low convex portion 1s, once the absorbed liquid is not easy to return to the surface, the use feeling is improved. In the surface sheet 1, the height hb (see FIG. 9) of the apex of the thickness direction (Z direction) of the high convex portion 1b improves the good skin feel of the surface sheet 1 and the density gradient of the reinforcing fibers. From the viewpoint of improving the introduction of a liquid, it is preferably 1.0 mm or more, further preferably 1.5 mm or more, and more preferably 7.0 mm or less, further preferably 5.0 mm or less, and more specifically, 1.0 mm or more and 7.0 mm or less, and more preferably 1.5 mm or more and 5.0 mm or less. The height hb of the high convex portion 1b is the maximum height of the high convex portion, and is also approximately the height at a position corresponding to the center of gravity of the large polygonal region BT. The height hb is measured in the same manner as the ratio (1) of the fiber density of the surface sheet 1 described later. In addition, regarding the raised angle θ3 from the bottom surface of the high convex portion 1b (refer to FIG. 10), from the viewpoint that menstrual blood is not easily contacted to the skin even with a large amount of menstrual blood, it is preferably 70 ° or more, and more preferably It is preferably 75 ° or more, and more preferably 90 ° or less, more preferably 85 ° or less, more specifically, 70 ° or more and 90 ° or less, and still more preferably 75 ° or more and 85 ° or less. The bulge angle θ3 is measured at the same time when the height hb is measured. In the surface sheet 1, the height hs (see FIG. 11) of the apex of the thickness direction (Z direction) of the low convex portion 1s improves the good skin feel of the surface sheet 1 and the density gradient of the reinforcing fibers. From the viewpoint of improving the introduction of liquid, it is preferably 0.4 mm or more, more preferably 0.8 mm or more, and more preferably 4.5 mm or less, further preferably 2.5 mm or less, and more specifically, 0.4 mm or more and 4.5 mm or less, and more preferably 0.8 mm or more and 2.5 mm or less. The height hs of the low convex portion 1s is the maximum height of the low convex portion 1s, and is also the height of the position corresponding to the center of gravity of the small polygonal area ST. The height hs is measured in the same manner as the ratio (1) of the fiber density of the surface sheet 1 described later. In addition, the raised angle θ4 from the bottom surface of the low convex portion 1s (refer to FIG. 11) is preferably 25 ° or more from the viewpoint that the menstrual blood is not easily contacted with the skin even when a large amount of menstrual blood is present. It is preferably 30 ° or more, and preferably 70 ° or less, more preferably 65 ° or less, more specifically, 25 ° or more and 70 ° or less, and further preferably 30 ° or more and 65 ° or less. The bulge angle θ4 is measured at the same time when the height hs is measured. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 6, when the high convex portion 1 b is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction Z so as to pass through the top 1 bt thereof, it has an interior filled with the first fiber layer 11. The top portion 1bu of the high convex portion on the top 1bt side and the bottom portion 1bd of the high convex portion on the second fiber layer 12 side opposite to the top 1bt have the second fiber layer 12. Here, the difference between the top 1bu of the high convex portion and the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion is that when the high convex 1b is imaginarily bisected in the thickness direction Z so as to pass through the top 1bt, the first fiber layer 11 is second Of the two divided parts, the part on the top 1bt side is the top 1bu of the high convex portion, and the part on the second fiber layer 12 side is the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion. In addition, the low convex portion 1s has a low convex portion top 1su on the top 1st side when the low convex portion 1s passes through the top 1st in the thickness direction Z in cross section, and The bottom portion 1sd of the low convex portion on the second fiber layer 12 side opposite to the top portion 1st further includes the second fiber layer 12. Here, the difference between the top of the low convex portion 1su and the bottom of the low convex portion 1sd is that when the low convex portion 1s is imaginarily bisected in the thickness direction Z so as to pass through the top 1st, the first fiber layer 11 is second graded. Among the two parts divided, the part on the top 1st side is set as the low convex part top 1su, and the part on the second fiber layer 12 side is set as the low convex part bottom 1sd. In addition, the thickness when the high convex part 1b is imaginarily bisected in the thickness direction Z means the thickness in a substantially no-load state. The term "substantially unloaded" refers to a 0.049 kPa load in order to suppress unevenness in the values of the nonwoven fabric as a fiber assembly. In addition, the thickness when the low convex portion 1s is virtually bisected along the thickness direction Z refers to a substantially no-load state similar to the thickness when the high convex portion 1b is substantially bisected along the thickness direction Z. Under the thickness. The term "substantially unloaded" refers to a 0.049 kPa load in order to suppress unevenness in the values of the nonwoven fabric as a fiber assembly. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 6, the fiber density at the top of the low convex portion 1su is higher than the fiber density at the top of the high convex portion 1bu, and is lower than the fiber density of the second fiber layer 12. As for the low convex portion 1s of the three-dimensional dome structure, the apex (reference point of the height hs) of the fiber density at the top 1st of the thickness direction (Z direction) is the highest among the low convex portions 1s. Similarly, regarding the high convex portion 1b of the three-dimensional dome structure, the apex (reference point of the height hs) of the fiber density at the top 1bt of the thickness direction (Z direction) is the highest among the high convex portions 1b. Moreover, the fiber density of the low convex part top 1su of the low convex part 1s is higher than the fiber density of the high convex part top 1bu of the high convex part 1b. The fiber density of the second fiber layer 12 is higher than that of the low convex portion 1s and the high convex portion 1b. That is, the fiber density of the second fiber layer 12 is higher than the fiber density of the apex (the reference point of the height hs) of the top 1st of the low convex portion 1s, and the apex (the reference point of the height hs) of the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b. Fiber density. If the surface sheet 1 having such a structure is used for a sanitary napkin 10 which is an example of an absorbent article, the liquid excreted during use is easily transferred to the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b that contacts the wearer's skin, and is easily introduced into the high convex It is not easy for liquid to remain on the surface inside the portion 1b. In addition, the liquid introduced into the inside of the high convex portion 1b is easily transferred to the second fiber layer 12, and the liquid once absorbed cannot easily return to the surface. In addition, even if a large amount of liquid is introduced into the high convex portion 1b, it is easy to exert the effect of being introduced into the low convex portion 1s having a high fiber density, and once the liquid is absorbed, it is not easy to return to the surface, and the use feeling is improved. The effect of "the liquid is not easy to return to the surface" is advantageous in that when it is used as the surface sheet 1 of the sanitary napkin 10, the liquid temporarily absorbed into the absorbent body 3 is not easy to return even if it is pressure-resistant by the wearer. Infiltration. The fiber density ds of the apex (reference point of height hs) in the thickness direction (Z direction) of the low convex portion 1s relative to the fiber density of the apex (reference point of height hb) of the thickness direction (Z direction) of the high convex portion 1b The ratio of db (ds / db) is preferably 1.2 times or more, more preferably 1.5 times or more, and preferably 3.0 times or less, and more preferably 2.5 in terms of enhancing the introduction of body fluids excreted. It is preferably 1.2 times or more and 3.0 times or less, more preferably 1.5 times or more and 2.5 times or less. The ratio of the fiber density of the surface sheet 1 can be measured using any of the two methods (1) and (2) described below. (1) In a case where the basis weight of the surface sheet 1 is substantially uniform (consistent) (or a case where it can be judged to be substantially uniform), the height (thickness) of the cut surface of the surface sheet 1 is measured. (2) In a case where the basis weight of the surface sheet 1 is uneven (or a case where it can be judged to be uneven), the average distance between the fibers of the cut surface of the surface sheet 1 is measured. Here, the determination of whether the basis weight of the surface sheet 1 is substantially uniform is performed as follows. Take 10 or more cut samples with a size of 10 cm in the X direction and 10 cm in the Y direction from the surface sheet 1. When measuring the basis weight of each, three times the standard deviation σ (3σ) is 10% of the average μ Within the range, if no fiber unevenness was observed in the appearance, it was determined to be substantially uniform. However, it is preferable to make a comprehensive judgment in consideration of various factors such as a difference in the composition of the micro area. First, the method (1) will be described. The surface sheet 1 viewed from a plane is cut along a straight line passing through the center of gravity (vertex in the Z direction) of the high convex portion 1b and the two welded portions 6 (intermediate joint portions 61) at both ends to measure the high convex portion 1b. With samples. Similarly, the low convex portion is cut along a straight line passing through the center of gravity (the vertex in the Z direction) of the low convex portion and the two welded portions 6 (the two intermediate joint portions 61 or the two other joint portions 62) at both ends. 1s measurement sample. At this time, care should be taken to avoid the reduction of the height of each measurement sample due to cutting. The cross-section measurement of each of the obtained measurement samples was performed using an electron microscope JCM-5100 manufactured by Japan Electronics Co., Ltd. under conditions of a sputtering time of 30 seconds (Pt) and an acceleration voltage of 10 KV. At least one of the welding portions 6 at both ends, or a plurality of images are combined so that the welding portion 6 is in a known condition, and the height (thickness) of each measurement sample is measured from the captured images. In addition, the measurement of the image may be performed using either a printed matter or a PC (Pesonal Computer) screen. In the method (1), the height hs (thickness) of the central portion of the sample for the measurement of the low convex portion 1s is divided by the height hb (thickness) of the center of the sample for the measurement of the high convex portion 1b as the ratio (ds) / db). Next, the method of (2) will be described. The cross section was measured in the same manner as in the method (1), except that the measurement was performed by the method in (1), and the cross section of each measurement sample was photographed at a magnification of 500 to 1000 times. An image analysis device (NEWQUBE manufactured by NEXUS) was used in an area where the number of fibers was 3 to 7 in the target measurement portion (the central portion of each measurement sample) and the width direction (planar direction) of each of the captured images. ver.4.20) Find the distance between the fibers closest to the center of gravity. In the above-mentioned measurement, the measurement is performed substantially integrally in the height (thickness) direction without repeating the distance closest to the center of gravity. For the cross section, at least 3 locations, preferably 5 locations, and more preferably 10 locations were measured, and the average value was used. In the method of (2), the distance between the centers of gravity closest to the center of the sample for the measurement of the low convex portion 1s is divided by the distance between the centers of gravity closest to the center of the sample for the measurement of the high convex portion 1b as the ratio of the density (ds / db). In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 6, each high convex portion 1b, each low convex portion 1s, and each connection convex portion 1c have a solid structure filled with fibers constituting the first fiber layer 11, and a welded portion. 6 (intermediate joint portion 61 and other joint portions 62) The interface between the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 between them is in a state where they are not joined but are tightly connected across the entire area. In this way, no gap is generated between the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12. In the surface sheet 1, the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 11 are fused by hot air at the intersections of the fibers. The fibers constituting the top of the high convex portion 1bu and the top of the low convex portion 1su are the same as the fibers constituting the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion and the bottom 1sd of the low convex portion. In the surface sheet 1, as the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 11, from the viewpoint of thermal fusion properties with the second fiber layer 12, thermally fusible fibers, especially fibers containing a thermoplastic polymer material, are used favorably. Examples of heat-fusible fibers include heat-fusible core-sheath composite fibers, heat-extensible fibers, non-heat-extensible fibers, heat-shrinkable fibers, non-heat-shrinkable fibers, three-dimensional crimped fibers, and latent crimpable fibers. And hollow fibers, non-heat-shrinkable fibers can be favorably used in the surface sheet 1. Examples of the thermoplastic polymer material include polyolefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate, and polyamides. As the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 11, a core-sheath composite fiber containing a combination of these thermoplastic polymer materials (e.g., polyethylene terephthalate or polypropylene as a core component, Ethylene as a sheath component). The core-sheath composite fiber may be a concentric core-sheath type, an eccentric core-sheath type, a side-by-side type, or a special shape, and a concentric core-sheath type is preferred. In the core-sheath type composite fiber, the heat-fusible fiber is preferably formed of a polyolefin-based resin at least on the surface. If the surface of the heat-fusible fiber as the constituent fiber of the surface sheet 1 is formed of a polyolefin-based resin, the surface of the fiber is melted by heat treatment, and the penetration of the fiber-treating agent into the fiber is likely to occur, thereby exerting the efficiency. The effect of reducing the hydrophilicity of a desired portion. Examples of the polyolefin-based resin that forms the surface of the heat-fusible fiber include polyethylene, polypropylene, and the like, and these can be used alone or in combination of two or more. The first fiber layer 11 preferably contains, as the above-mentioned heat-fusible fiber, fibers of 60% by mass or more, particularly 80% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, of the latent coil contained in the second fiber layer 12 described later. The shrinkable fiber does not shrink at the shrinking start temperature. It is also possible to make the first fiber layer 11 contain the potentially crimpable fibers contained in the second fiber layer 12, so that the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 may be caused to sparse the first fiber layer 11 and make the first fiber layer 11 From the viewpoint of the density gradient of 2 dense layers of 2 fibers, the content ratio of the potentially crimpable fibers in the first fiber layer 11 is preferably 80% by mass or less. The degree of crystallization when the heat-fusible fibers constituting the first fiber layer 11 are non-composite fibers (single fibers) is preferably 30% or more, and more preferably 35% or more, from the viewpoint of hot air reproducibility. It is more preferably 40% or more, and from the viewpoint of texture, it is preferably 60% or less, more preferably 50% or less, and still more preferably 45% or less. When the heat-fusible fibers constituting the first fiber layer 11 are composite fibers having a plurality of resins, it is preferable that the high-melting resin having a relatively high melting point and the low-melting resin having a relatively low melting point each have the following crystals.化 度。 Degree. When the high-melting resin (the core component when the heat-fusible fiber is a core-sheath composite fiber) is a polypropylene resin (PP), the degree of crystallization is preferably 60% or less from the viewpoint of texture, It is more preferably 50% or less, still more preferably 45% or less, and from the viewpoint of hot air reproducibility, it is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 35% or more, and still more preferably 40% or more. When the high-melting resin (core component when the heat-fusible fiber is a core-sheath composite fiber) is polyethylene terephthalate (PET), the degree of crystallinity is better from the viewpoint of texture 50% or less, more preferably 40% or less, further preferably 30% or less, and from the viewpoint of hot air reproducibility, 15% or more is preferable, 20% or more is more preferable, and 25% is more preferable the above. The degree of crystallization of the resin is determined by the following method. <The measuring method of the crystallinity degree of a resin> The crystallinity degree χ of a resin is calculated | required by following formula (1). χ = (1- (ρc-ρ) / (ρc-ρa)) × 100 (1) "ρc" in the above formula (1) is the crystal density of the resin, and 0.936 [g / cm3 ], 1.457 [g / cm when the resin is PET3 ] (See reference 3 below). In addition, "ρa" in the above formula (1) is the amorphous density of the resin, and is 0.850 [g / cm when the resin is PP.3 ], 1.35 [g / cm when the resin is PET3 ] (See reference 3 below). The "ρ" in the above formula (1) is obtained by the following formula (2). ρ = ρc-(ρc-ρa) × (Lorentz density B-Lorentz density A) / (Lorentz density B-Lorentz density C) (2) "Luolun" The density “A” is obtained by the following formula (3). In addition, "n" in the following formula (3) is an average refractive index, and the refractive index "np" in the parallel direction and the refractive index "nv" in the vertical direction of the measured values are obtained from the following formula (4) . Lawrence density A = (n2 -1) / (n2 +1) (3) n2 = (Np2 + 2nv2 ) / 3 (4) The "Lorentz density B" in the above formula (2) is obtained by substituting n for the refractive index of the crystal of each resin species in the above formula (3), in the case of PP In this case, n = 1.52 is used, and in the case of PET, n = 1.64 is used (refer to the following reference 2 and reference 1 respectively). The "Lorentz density C" in the above formula (2) is obtained by substituting n for the amorphous refractive index of each resin species in the above formula (3). In the case of PP, n = 1.47 is used. In the case of PET, n = 1.58 is used (refer to Reference 2 and Reference 1 below, respectively).・ Reference 1: "Saturated polyester resin manual" (Issued by: Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun, first edition, 1989) ・ Reference 2: "Polymer Handbook" (A WILEY-INTERSCIENCE PUBLICATION, 1999)・ Reference 3: "Introduction to Advanced Structure Analysis of Plastic Molded Products" (Editor (Institute of Plastic Molding and Processing, First Edition, 2006)) In addition, generally speaking, the degree of crystallinity is regarded as the method or condition of measurement. The crystal structure is different, so it is impossible to discuss the absolute value between different measurement methods and conditions. The melting point of each resin component constituting the heat-fusible fiber is a finely cut fiber sample (sample weight 2 mg) using a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC6200 manufactured by Seiko Instruments Co., Ltd.) at a heating rate of 10 ° C / min. ), And the melting peak temperature of each resin is measured, and it is defined by the melting peak temperature. The temperature at which the molecules of the resin component begin to flow is a temperature at which the resin component is fused to such an extent that the strength of the fusion point of the fiber can be measured as the softening point. When the melting point of a resin component cannot be clearly measured by this method, this resin is defined as "a resin having no melting point." In this case, a softening point is used instead of the melting point. Examples of the form of the fiber assembly constituting the first fiber layer 11 include a fiber web formed by a carding method, a non-woven fabric formed by a thermal fusion method, a non-woven fabric formed by a spunlace method, and Non-woven fabrics formed by needle punching, non-woven fabrics formed by solvent bonding, non-woven fabrics formed by spunbonding, non-woven fabrics formed by melt-blowing, or knitted fabrics. The fiber web formed by the carding method refers to a fiber assembly in a state before being woven. That is, the fiber aggregate is in a state in which the fibers in a state in which the subsequent treatment, such as the heat fusion treatment by the hot air method or the calender method, is not applied to the card used when manufacturing the nonwoven fabric are entangled relatively loosely. When the fiber web formed by the carding method is used for the first fiber layer 11, the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 are joined at the same time, or after joining, by thermal fusion or a solvent. The fibers in the first fiber layer 11 are adhered to each other, or are mechanically entangled. The second fiber layer 12 also includes a fiber assembly. The second fiber layer 12 includes heat-shrinkable fibers that are latently crimpable fibers that are crimped in a spiral shape as the crimped fibers that are crimped in a spiral shape. The latently crimpable fiber refers to a fiber having properties such that it can be treated in the same manner as the conventional non-woven fabric fiber before heating, and shrinks by showing a spiral crimp by heating at a shrinking temperature. The surface sheet 1 of the present embodiment is formed by laminating a second fiber layer 12 containing 100% of potentially shrinkable fibers and a first fiber layer 11 containing 100% of the above-mentioned heat-fusible fibers, and locally bonding the two. Then, a latent crimpable fiber in the second fiber layer 12 is thermally contracted, the second fiber layer 12 is thermally contracted, and a portion other than the welded portion 6 in the first fiber layer 11 is convexly raised. By using latently crimpable fibers as the constituent fibers of the second fiber layer 12, it is possible to simultaneously exhibit the heat shrinkability of the second fiber layer 12 and the second fiber layer 12 after the heat shrinkage, and then the elastomer of the surface sheet 1. The behavior of both. Potentially crimpable fibers include, for example, eccentric core-sheath composite fibers or side-by-side composite fibers composed of two types of thermoplastic polymer materials having different shrinkage rates. Examples thereof include those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-296325 or Japanese Patent No. 2759331. Examples of two types of thermoplastic polymer materials having different shrinkage rates include a combination of an ethylene-propylene random copolymer and polypropylene. Shrinking temperature refers to the temperature between two softening points of a component having a relatively low softening point and a component having a relatively high softening point in a plurality of types of thermoplastic polymers possessed by the latently crimpable fibers. The shrinkage onset temperature refers to a softening point of a component having a relatively low softening point. When a latently crimpable fiber is heated to a temperature between two softening points, only the components with a lower softening point begin to shrink. As a result, the entire fiber shrinks in a helical shape to show crimping, thereby forming a crimped fiber. The heat treatment temperature in the heat-shrinking step described later may be appropriately adjusted corresponding to the softening point of the resin constituting the latent crimpable fiber, that is, corresponding to the shrinkage temperature. Examples of the form of the fiber assembly constituting the second fiber layer 12 include a fiber web containing latent crimpable fibers and formed by a carding method, a non-woven fabric formed by a thermal fusion method, and a spunlace method. The non-woven fabric formed, the non-woven fabric formed by the needle punch method, the non-woven fabric formed by the solvent bonding method, the non-woven fabric formed by the spunbond method, and the non-woven fabric formed by the melt-blowing method, preferably by A fiber web formed by carding. From the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom of the fibers and improving the permeability of the sticky substance, the fiber assembly constituting the second fiber layer 12 is preferably a portion bonded to the first fiber layer 11 without using the welded portion 6. The constituent fibers are not thermally fused to each other. The first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 may be mixed with a fiber other than the above, for example, water-absorbent fibers such as rayon, cotton, and hydrophilic acrylic fibers. For example, fibers other than latent crimpable fibers such as heat-fusible fibers prepared in the first fiber layer 11 may be mixed in the second fiber layer 12. The heat-fusible fiber is blended for the purpose of stabilizing the shape and improving wrinkle / wrinkle resistance, for example. In the surface sheet 1, the second fiber layer 12 preferably contains 60% by mass or more, particularly 80% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less of potentially shrinkable fibers. The content rate of the heat-shrinkable fiber as used herein includes the content rate of both those having a helical crimp and those having no helical crimp. When the content of the latently crimpable fibers is 80% by mass or more, portions other than the welded portion 6 of the first fiber layer 11 can be sufficiently convexly deformed, and a fluffy surface sheet 1 can be obtained. In the surface sheet 1, the thickness of the first fiber layer 11 is particularly sufficient in terms of the compressible and deformable portion when pressure from the skin is applied, and the softness is improved. The first fiber layer of the high convex portion 1b The thickness of 11 is preferably 0.6 mm or more, particularly preferably 1 mm or more, and more preferably 7 mm or less, and even more preferably 3 mm or less. The thickness of the first fiber layer 11 of the low convex portion 1s is preferably 0.3 mm or more, particularly preferably 0.5 mm or more, and more preferably 4.4 mm or less, and even more preferably 1.5 mm or less. The second fiber layer 12 preferably has a higher density than the first fiber from the viewpoint of stably exhibiting excellent liquid introduction properties due to the dense density gradient between the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12. One fiber layer 11 is thinner than the first fiber layer 11. From the viewpoint of the texture and texture of the surface sheet 1, the thickness of the second fiber layer 12 of the high convex portion 1b is preferably 0.1 mm or more, particularly preferably 0.2 mm or more, and preferably 3.4 mm or less. Particularly preferred is 1.5 mm or less. The thickness of the second fiber layer 12 of the low convex portion 1s is preferably 0.1 mm or more, particularly preferably 0.2 mm or more, and more preferably 2.2 mm or less, and even more preferably 1.0 mm or less. The surface sheet 1 has a basis weight of 20 g / m in terms of fluffiness or softness when used in an absorbent article.2 Above, particularly preferably 50 g / m2 Above, and preferably 200 g / m2 Below, particularly preferably 100 g / m2 the following. In the surface sheet 1, since the second fiber layer 12 uses latent crimpable fibers, the basis weight in the non-woven state is greater than that in the fiber web state through the heat shrinking step described later. Therefore, unlike the case where latent crimpable fibers are not used, a surface sheet 1 having a larger basis weight can be easily obtained without using a method such as laminating a plurality of fiber webs. By having such a large basis weight, the texture can be made comfortable by improving the cushioning feeling, and the amount of liquid adhered to the skin can be reduced by the excretion liquid being absorbed without spreading on the surface sheet, especially by Whitens the appearance of menstrual blood and improves the sense of peace and cleanliness. The basis weight is obtained by cutting the surface sheet 1 to a size of 50 mm × 50 mm or more, measuring the weight of the measurement piece using an electronic balance with a minimum display of 1 mg, and calculating the basis weight. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 6, when the high convex portion 1 b is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction Z so as to pass through the top 1 bt, it is formed as a high convex portion on the top 1 bt side of the first fiber layer 11. The hydrophilicity of the top portion 1bu is higher than that of the bottom portion 1bd of the high convex portion on the second fiber layer 12 side of the first fiber layer 11, and the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 is higher than that of the top portion 1bu of the high convex portion. It is preferable that the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 of the high convex portion top 1bu, the high convex portion bottom 1bd, and the high convex portion 1b is: the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12> the hydrophilicity of the top 1bu of the high convex portion > The hydrophilicity of the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion. If the surface sheet 1 having such a structure is used for a sanitary napkin 10 which is an example of an absorbent article, the liquid excreted during use can be easily transferred to the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b in contact with the wearer's skin, and liquid on the surface is not easy to remain . In addition, the liquid introduced into the inside of the high convex portion 1b is easily transferred to the second fiber layer 12, and once the absorbed liquid is not easily returned to the surface, the use feeling is improved. In the surface sheet 1, as shown in FIG. 6, when the low convex portion 1 s is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction Z so as to pass through the top 1 st, it is formed to be low on the top 1 st side of the first fiber layer 11. The hydrophilicity of the top 1su of the convex portion is higher than the hydrophilicity of the bottom 1sd of the low convex portion on the second fiber layer 12 side of the first fiber layer 11. The hydrophilicity of the top 1su of the low convex portion is higher than that of the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion. The hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 is higher than the hydrophilicity of the top 1su of the low convex portion. It is preferable that the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 of the low convex portion top 1su, the low convex portion bottom 1sd, the high convex portion 1b high convex portion top 1bu, and the low convex portion 1s is: Hydrophilicity> Hydrophilicity at the top of the low convex portion 1su> Hydrophilicity at the bottom of the low convex portion 1sd and hydrophilicity at the bottom of the high convex portion 1b. If the surface sheet 1 having such a structure is used for a sanitary napkin 10 which is an example of an absorbent article, the liquid excreted during use can be easily transferred to the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b in contact with the wearer's skin, and liquid on the surface is not easy to remain. . In addition, the liquid introduced into the inside of the high convex portion 1b is easily transferred to the second fiber layer 12, and the liquid once absorbed cannot easily return to the surface. In addition, even if a large amount of liquid is introduced into the high convex portion 1b, it is easy to exert the effect of being introduced into the low convex portion 1s having a high fiber density, and once the liquid is absorbed, it is not easy to return to the surface, and the use feeling is improved. Regarding the above-mentioned high convex portion 1b and the low convex portion 1s, the so-called hydrophilicity of the top of the high convex portion 1bu refers to the hydrophilicity of the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b in the first fiber layer 11, and the hydrophilicity of the so-called low convex portion top 1su. The degree refers to the hydrophilicity of the top 1st of the low convex portion 1s in the first fiber layer 11. The hydrophilicity of the bottom portion 1bd of the high convex portion refers to the hydrophilicity of the lowermost portion of the high convex portion 1b (the portion of the high convex portion 1b opposite to the top portion 1bt) in the first fiber layer 11, and the so-called low convex portion The hydrophilicity of the bottom 1sd refers to the hydrophilicity of the lowermost portion of the low convex portion 1s (the portion of the low convex portion 1s opposite to the top portion 1st) in the first fiber layer 11. The hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 refers to the hydrophilicity of the portion showing the highest hydrophilicity when the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 is measured along the thickness direction Z. The hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 of the high convex portion 1b The hydrophilicity is the same as that of the second fiber layer 12 of the low convex portion 1s. The "hydrophilicity" in the present invention is determined based on the contact angle of the fiber measured by the method described below. Specifically, lower hydrophilicity has the same meaning as larger contact angle, and higher hydrophilicity has the same meaning as smaller contact angle. <Measurement method of contact angle> Using a razor blade, a portion of the surface sheet 1 of the measurement object that crosses the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b and the top 1st of the low convex portion 1s is cut vertically. The cut surface was observed with an optical microscope, and the fiber was taken out from a specific portion in the thickness direction Z, and the contact angle of the fiber with the water was measured. As a measuring device, an automatic contact angle meter MCA-J manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd. was used. The contact angle was measured using distilled water. The amount of liquid ejected from the inkjet-type water droplet ejection section (pulse ejector CTC-25, manufactured by Cluster Technology, with an orifice diameter of 25 μm) was set to 20 picoliters, and water droplets were dropped just above the fibers. Then, the dropping condition is recorded in a high-speed recording device connected to a horizontally set camera. From the viewpoint of subsequent image analysis, the video recording device is preferably a personal computer incorporating a high-speed capture device. In this measurement, images were recorded every 17 msec. In the recorded video, the initial image of the water droplets dripping on the fiber taken out from the surface sheet 1 was through the attached software FAMAS (the software version is 2.6.2, the analysis method is the droplet method, and the analysis method is θ / 2 method, the image processing algorithm is non-reflection, the image processing image mode is frame, the threshold level is 200, and no curvature correction is performed. The angle is used as the contact angle. The fiber taken out from the surface sheet 1 to be measured was cut to a fiber length of 1 mm, and the fiber was placed on a sample table of a contact angle meter and maintained horizontally. The contact angle of two different parts of one fiber was measured. Measure the contact angle of N = 5 to one digit after the decimal point, and define the average value (rounded to the second digit after the decimal point) of the measured values in a total of 10 locations as the contact angle. It should be noted that, hereinafter referred to as a "contact angle of water" is a contact angle measured by this measurement method. In the surface sheet 1, as described above, in the first fiber layer 11, the hydrophilicity of the top 1bu of the high convex portion is higher than that of the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion, and the hydrophilicity of the top 1su of the low convex portion is higher than that of the low convex portion. The hydrophilicity of the bottom part 1sd. In order to provide such a gradient of hydrophilicity to the first fiber layer 11, it is preferable that the first fiber layer 11 contains a heat-fusible fiber to which a fiber treatment agent described later is adhered. In this case, in the first fiber layer 11, from the top of the high convex portion 1bu toward the bottom of the high convex portion 1bd, or from the top of the low convex portion 1su toward the bottom of the low convex portion 1sd, the hydrophilicity may gradually decrease, and the hydrophilicity may also decrease. Can be lowered stepwise. It is particularly preferred that the hydrophilicity gradually decreases from the top 1bu of the high convex portion toward the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion, and the hydrophilicity gradually decreases from the top 1su of the low convex portion toward the bottom 1sd of the low convex portion. The "gradual change in hydrophilicity" means that there is no boundary surface between the high convex portion top 1bu and the high convex portion bottom 1bd, or between the low convex portion top 1su and the low convex portion bottom 1sd. With this configuration, the bodily fluid is easily transferred from the skin-contacting surface side to the non-skin-contacting surface side, and thus the feeling of use is improved. Here, the "gradual decrease" of the hydrophilicity means that the hydrophilicity has a gradation, and the hydrophilicity gradually decreases from the top 1bu of the high convex portion toward the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion, or from the top 1su of the low convex portion toward the bottom 1sd of the low convex portion. Slowly go low. In the first fiber layer 11, the hydrophilicity gradually decreases from the top 1bu of the high convex portion toward the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion, or gradually decreases from the top 1su of the low convex portion toward the bottom 1sd of the low convex portion, which can be measured by the following method. In the first fiber layer 11, for example, the high convex portion 1 b is virtually three-divisionally divided in the thickness direction Z. Then, a hydrophilicity of 4 points in total was measured at one point on each of the two imaginary lines of the high convex portion 1b, and the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b and the lowermost portion of the high convex portion 1b. At this time, the case where the contact angle sequentially increases from the top 1bt toward the bottom of the first fiber layer 11 is referred to as "gradual decrease in hydrophilicity". The same applies to the case of the low convex portion 1s. Regardless of whether the hydrophilicity is gradually lowered or stepwise lowered, in the first fiber layer 11, regarding the contact angle of the water at the top of the high convex portion 1bu, from the viewpoint that the first fiber layer 11 will not keep the liquid more than necessary From the viewpoint of 65 ° or more, more preferably 70 ° or more, and still more preferably 73 ° or more, and from the viewpoint that the liquid is absorbed without flowing on the surface of the first fiber layer 11, it is preferably 90. ° or less, more preferably 85 or less, and even more preferably 75 or less. On the other hand, in the first fiber layer 11, the contact angle of water at the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion is preferably 75 ° or more from the viewpoint of suppressing the liquid return from the second fiber layer 12, and more preferably 80 ° or more, and more preferably 85 ° or more, and from the viewpoint of quickly transferring the liquid to the second fiber layer 12 at the time of liquid absorption, it is preferably 90 ° or less, more preferably 88 ° or less, and further preferably It is 86 ° or less. Regardless of whether the hydrophilicity gradually decreases, or stepwise becomes lower, in the first fiber layer 11, regarding the contact angle of water at the top 1su of the low convex portion, the liquid in the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion is easily transferred to a low level. From the viewpoint of the convex portion 1s, it is preferably 65 ° or more, more preferably 70 ° or more, and still more preferably 73 ° or more, and from the viewpoint that the liquid is absorbed without flowing on the surface of the first fiber layer 11. Is preferably 90 ° or less, more preferably 85 ° or less, and even more preferably 75 ° or less. On the other hand, in the first fiber layer 11, the contact angle of water at the bottom 1sd of the low convex portion is preferably 75 ° or more from the viewpoint of suppressing the liquid return from the second fiber layer 12, and more preferably 80 ° or more, and more preferably 85 ° or more, and from the viewpoint of quickly transferring the liquid to the second fiber layer 12 at the time of liquid absorption, it is preferably 90 ° or less, more preferably 88 ° or less, and further preferably It is 86 ° or less. Regarding the difference between the contact angle of water at the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion and the contact angle of water at the top 1bu of the high convex portion, from the viewpoint of preventing liquid return, it is preferably 1 ° or more, more preferably 5 ° or more, and more It is preferably 7 ° or more, and from the viewpoint of quickly transferring the liquid to the second fiber layer 12 during liquid absorption, it is preferably 20 ° or less, more preferably 18 ° or less, and even more preferably 15 ° or less. From the same point of view, the ratio of the contact angle of water at the top of the high convex portion to the contact angle of water at the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion, that is, the value of the contact angle of the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion is the denominator, and the high convex portion The value of the contact angle of the top 1bu as a molecule is preferably 0.7 or more, more preferably 0.75 or more, still more preferably 0.8 or more, and more preferably 0.95 or less, more preferably 0.9 or less, and still more preferably 0.85 or less. Regarding the difference between the contact angle of water at 1sd at the bottom of the low convex portion and the contact angle of water at 1su at the top of the low convex portion, it is preferably 1 ° or more, more preferably 5 ° or more, and It is preferably 7 ° or more, and from the viewpoint of quickly transferring the liquid to the second fiber layer 12 during liquid absorption, it is preferably 20 ° or less, more preferably 18 ° or less, and even more preferably 15 ° or less. From the same point of view, the ratio of the contact angle of water at the top of the low convex portion to the contact angle of water at the bottom of the low convex portion 1sd, that is, the value of the contact angle of water at the bottom of the low convex portion 1sd is taken as the denominator and The value of the contact angle of 1su at the top of the convex portion as a molecule is preferably 0.7 or more, more preferably 0.75 or more, still more preferably 0.8 or more, and more preferably 0.95 or less, more preferably 0.9 or less, and still more preferably 0.85. the following. Regarding the difference between the contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion 1bd and the contact angle of the water at the top of the low convex portion 1su, from the viewpoint that the liquid in the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion is easily transferred to the low convex portion 1s, it is preferably 1 Above 5 °, more preferably above 5 °, even more preferably above 7 °, and from the viewpoint of quickly transferring the liquid to the second fiber layer 12 at the time of liquid absorption, preferably below 20 °, even more preferably 18 ° or less, and more preferably 15 ° or less. From the same point of view, the ratio of the contact angle of the water at the top of the low convex portion to the contact angle of the water at the bottom of the high convex portion 1bd, that is, the value of the contact angle of the water at the bottom of the high convex portion 1bd is taken as the denominator and The value of the contact angle of water at the top of the convex part 1su is preferably 0.7 or more, more preferably 0.75 or more, more preferably 0.8 or more, and more preferably 0.9 or less, more preferably 0.88 or less, and more preferably It is 0.85 or less. Compared with the first fiber layer 11 having a gradient of hydrophilicity, the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 in the surface sheet 1 is substantially the same in any part of the second fiber layer 12. The contact angle of water of the second fiber layer 12 is based on the condition that the contact angle of water is smaller than that of the top of the high convex portion 1bu and the top of the low convex portion 1su. From the viewpoint that the second fiber layer 12 does not maintain the liquid continuously, it is preferable. It is 50 ° or more, more preferably 55 ° or more, and even more preferably 57 ° or more. From the viewpoint of drawing the liquid from the first fiber layer 11, it is preferably 70 ° or less, and more preferably 65 ° or less. It is preferably 60 ° or less. The ratio of the contact angle of water in the second fiber layer 12 to the contact angle of water in the portion where the contact angle of water is small in the top of the high convex portion 1bu and the top of the low convex portion 1su, that is, the top of the high convex portion 1bu and the low convex portion The contact angle of water in the part where the contact angle of water in the top 1su is small is used as the denominator, and the value of the contact angle of water in the second fiber layer 12 is used as the numerator, which is preferably 0.65 or more, more preferably 0.7 or more, and more It is preferably at least 0.75, more preferably at most 0.95, more preferably at most 0.9, and even more preferably at most 0.85. In addition, the ratio of the contact angle of water in the second fiber layer 12 to the contact angle of water in the portion where the contact angle of water in the middle of the high convex portion 1bu and the top of the low convex portion 1su is greater, that is, the top of the high convex portion 1bu and lower When the contact angle of water in the part where the contact angle of water in the top part 1su of the protrusion is larger is used as the denominator and the value of the contact angle of water in the second fiber layer 12 is used as the numerator, it is preferably 0.55 or more, more preferably 0.6 or more, It is more preferably 0.65 or more, and more preferably 0.85 or less, more preferably 0.8 or less, and still more preferably 0.75 or less. In order to manufacture the surface sheet 1 including each layer and each part having a contact angle (the relationship of hydrophilicity) as described above, a fiber treatment agent described later is used, and the blowing conditions of the hot air in the hot air method described later are appropriately controlled, That is, the temperature or amount of hot air is sufficient. Next, the fiber treatment agent used when manufacturing the surface sheet 1 is demonstrated. The adhesion of the fiber treatment agent to the surface of the constituent fibers of the surface sheet 1 can make the surface of the constituent fibers more hydrophilic than before the fiber treatment agent is attached. In the surface sheet 1, as described above, the hydrophilicity of the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 are different, and the main reason is that the types of fiber treatment agents contained in the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 are different. different. The fiber treatment agents for different fiber layers will be described below. [Fiber treatment agent contained in the first fiber layer] The fiber treatment agent adhered to the heat-fusible fibers included in the first fiber layer 11 contains a polyorganosiloxane ((A) component) and an alkyl phosphate (( B) component) and an anionic surfactant represented by the following general formula (1), or a polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester ((C) component). As component (C), one or two or more selected from the group consisting of an anionic surfactant represented by the following general formula (1) and a polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester can be used. The component (C) refers to a component that does not contain an alkyl phosphate as the component (B). [Chemical 1](In the formula, Z represents a linear or branched alkyl chain having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, which may contain an ester group, a amine group, an amine group, a polyoxyalkylene group, an ether group, or a double bond, and R1 And R2 Each independently represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms which may contain an ester group, amidino group, polyoxyalkylene group, ether group, or double bond, and X represents -SO3 M, -OSO3 M or -COOM, M represents H, Na, K, Mg, Ca, or ammonium) A fiber to which a fiber treatment agent containing the three components (A) to (C) described above is attached is softened by a resin constituting the surface of the fiber When heat treatment is performed at a temperature above the point, the polyorganosiloxane (component (A)) promotes the penetration of the anionic surfactant (component (C)) having an alkyl chain into the fiber. Therefore, the hydrophilicity of the surface of the fiber is changed to a lower value by heat treatment. The reason is that the polyorganosiloxane particularly promotes the penetration of the anionic surfactant having an alkyl chain of two or more chains into the fiber, and the hydrophilicity of the fiber surface is easily reduced by heat treatment. The reason is presumed that, because the polysiloxane chain of polyorganosiloxane is incompatible with the alkyl chain of the anionic surfactant, when the fiber is heated and melted, the anionic surfactant will penetrate into the fiber which is more easily compatible. . In the component (C), the anionic surfactant represented by the general formula (1) has an alkyl chain of two or more chains, and the alkyl group is fluffy and can penetrate into the fiber by including a hydrophilic group. In this case, it is easy to promote penetration into the fiber by the presence of polyorganosiloxane. In addition, in the component (C), the polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester easily arranges the hydrophobic chain in a radial shape and has a structure that easily surrounds the hydrophilic group. Therefore, when it is used, it is the same as that used normally. Compared with the case of a surfactant having a linear hydrocarbon chain, the penetration into the fiber is facilitated by the presence of polyorganosiloxane. Thereby, for example, in the step of reducing the hydrophilicity of the hot air blowing to the fiber web as one of the manufacturing steps of the surface sheet 1 described later, the heat received by the fibers in the fiber web is on the hot air blowing surface and the surface on the opposite side (the net (Face) is naturally different, by which the fibers on the hot air blowing surface and the fibers on the opposite side receive different heat. The value of the contact angle between the fibers on the hot air blowing surface and the fibers on the opposite side It has also changed. In this case, a nonwoven fabric having a gradient of hydrophilicity from one surface side of the nonwoven fabric toward the other surface side opposite thereto can be produced. Hereinafter, the three components (A) to (C) will be described. [Polyorganosiloxane ((A) component)] As the polyorganosiloxane which is one of the essential components of the fiber treatment agent contained in the first fiber layer, a linear one having a cross-linked two-dimensional shape can be used. Any one of the three-dimensional network structures is preferably a substantially linear one. Specific examples of the preferred organic polysiloxanes of the present invention are alkyl alkoxy silanes or aryl alkoxy silanes, polymers of alkyl haloxanes, or cyclic siloxanes as alkoxy groups. , Typically methoxy. As the alkyl group, a carbon group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly 1 to 4 carbon atoms may have a side chain alkyl group. Examples of the aryl group include phenyl, alkylphenyl, and alkoxyphenyl. Cyclic alkyl groups such as cyclohexyl or cyclopentyl can also be substituted for alkyl or aryl, such as aralkyl such as benzyl. In addition, the so-called polyorganosiloxane in the present invention does not include modification by a polyoxyethylene (POE) chain having a higher hydrophilicity from the viewpoint of increasing the contact angle of the fiber surface by heating. Polyorganosiloxane. As the most typical and most typical polyorganosiloxane, polydimethylsiloxane, polydiethylsiloxane, polydipropylsiloxane, etc. are preferred, and polydimethylsiloxane is particularly preferred. The molecular weight of the polyorganosiloxane is preferably a high molecular weight. Specifically, the weight average molecular weight is preferably 100,000 or more, more preferably 150,000 or more, still more preferably 200,000 or more, and more preferably It is 1 million or less, more preferably 800,000 or less, and still more preferably 600,000 or less. In addition, as the polyorganosiloxane, two or more polyorganosiloxanes having different molecular weights may be used. When two or more kinds of polyorganosiloxanes having different molecular weights are used, the weight average molecular weight of one of them is preferably 100,000 or more, more preferably 150,000 or more, still more preferably 200,000 or more, and more preferably 1 million or less, more preferably 800,000 or less, further preferably 600,000 or less, and the weight average molecular weight of the other is preferably less than 100,000, more preferably 50,000 or less, more preferably 35,000 or less, and furthermore It is preferably 20,000 or less, and more preferably 2,000 or more, more preferably 3,000 or more, and even more preferably 5,000 or more. In addition, a preferable blending ratio of the polyorganosiloxane having a weight average molecular weight of 100,000 or more and the polyorganosiloxane having a weight average molecular weight of less than 100,000 (the former: the latter) is preferably 1:10 to 4 in terms of mass ratio. : 1, more preferably 1: 5 to 2: 1. The weight average molecular weight of the polyorganosiloxane is measured using GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography, gel permeation chromatography). The measurement conditions are as follows. The calculation of the converted molecular weight was performed using polystyrene. Separation column: GMHHR-H ＋ GMHHR-H (cation) Eluent: L Farmin DM20 / CHCl3 Solvent flow rate: 1.0 ml / min Separation column temperature: 40 ° C About the content of polyorganosiloxane in the fiber treatment agent, From the viewpoint of increasing the change in hydrophilicity caused by heat treatment, it is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more, with respect to the total mass of the fiber treatment agent. The content of the polyorganosiloxane in the fiber treatment agent is preferably 30% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the fiber treatment agent from the viewpoint that the liquid is easily absorbed on the surface of the nonwoven fabric, and more preferably 20%. Mass% or less. For example, the content of the polyorganosiloxane in the fiber treatment agent is preferably 1% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the fiber treatment agent. As the polyorganosiloxane, a commercially available product may be used. For example, "KF-96H-1 million Cs" manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicones, "SH200Fluid1000000Cs" manufactured by Dow Corning Toray, and Shin-Etsu Silicones, which contains two types of polyorganosiloxanes, can be used. "KM-903" manufactured by the company, or "BY22-060" manufactured by Dow Corning Toray. [Alkyl phosphate ((B) component)] The alkyl phosphate, which is one of the essential components of the fiber treatment agent contained in the first fiber layer 11, is used to improve the cardability of the raw cotton or the uniformity of the fiber web. It is one of the anionic surfactants, which is formulated into fiber treatment agents for the purpose of improving the productivity of the non-woven fabric and preventing the decrease in quality. Specific examples of the alkyl phosphate include a saturated carbon chain such as stearyl phosphate, myristyl phosphate, lauryl phosphate, and palmitic phosphate, or an unsaturated carbon such as oleyl phosphate and palmityl phosphate. And those who have side chains on these carbon chains. More preferably, it is a completely neutralized or partially neutralized salt of a mono- or dialkyl ester of a phosphate carbon chain of 16 to 18. Examples of the salt of the alkyl phosphate include alkali metals such as sodium and potassium, ammonia, and various amines. The alkyl phosphate may be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds. Regarding the content of the alkyl phosphate in the fiber treating agent, from the viewpoints of the card passing ability or the uniformity of the fiber web, it is preferably 5 mass% or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more, and from the viewpoint of not hindering the hydrophobization of fibers produced by polyorganosiloxane due to heat treatment, it is preferably 30% by mass or less relative to the total mass of the fiber treatment agent It is more preferably 25% by mass or less. [Anionic surfactant ((C) component) represented by the general formula (1)] As X in the general formula (1) is -SO3 M, that is, the anionic surfactant whose hydrophilic group is a sulfonic acid or a salt thereof, and examples thereof include dialkylsulfonic acid or a salt thereof. Specific examples of the dialkylsulfonic acid include di (octadecyl) sulfosuccinic acid, didecylsulfosuccinic acid, di (tridecyl) sulfosuccinic acid, and di-2- Dialkyl sulfosuccinic acid such as ethylhexylsulfosuccinic acid, dicarboxylic acid such as dialkyl sulfoglutaric acid, and sulfonated α-position of the diester; or 2-sulfo Saturated fatty acid or unsaturated fatty acid ester (or amidine) such as 1-ethyl myristate (or amidine) sodium salt, or 1-ethyl 2-sulfohexadecanoate (or amidine) sodium salt Α-sulfo fatty acid alkyl ester (or amidine) sulfonated at the α-position; or a dialkyl olefin sulfonate obtained by sulfonating an internal olefin of a hydrocarbon chain or an internal olefin of an unsaturated fatty acid Acid etc. The number of carbon atoms in each of the two alkyl groups of the dialkylsulfonic acid is preferably 4 or more and 14 or less, and particularly preferably 6 or more and 10 or less. Examples of the anionic surfactant whose hydrophilic group is a sulfonic acid or a salt thereof include the following anionic surfactants. [Chemical 2][Chemical 3]X in the general formula (1) is -OSO3 M, that is, the above-mentioned anionic surfactant whose hydrophilic group is sulfuric acid or a salt thereof, and examples thereof include dialkyl sulfate, and specific examples thereof include 2-ethylhexyl sulfate sodium salt or 2-hexyldecyl sulfate A compound obtained by sulfating a branched alcohol such as a sodium salt, or a branched alcohol such as polyoxyethylene sulfate 2-hexyldecyl sulfate or polyoxyethylene sulfate 2-hexyldecyl sulfate, and a sulfur group POE chain compounds, or hydroxy fatty acid esters (or amidines) such as 12-sulfate 1-methyl stearate (or amidine), 3-sulfate hexanoate 1-methyl ester (or amidine) ) Sulfated compounds. Examples of the anionic surfactant whose hydrophilic group is sulfuric acid or a salt thereof include the following anionic surfactants. [Chemical 4]Examples of the anionic surfactant in which X is -COOM in the general formula (1), that is, the hydrophilic group is a carboxylic acid or a salt thereof, include a dialkylcarboxylic acid. As a specific example, 11-ethyl Compounds that partially alkoxylate hydroxyl groups of hydroxy fatty acids such as sodium oxyheptadecanate carboxylic acid sodium salt or sodium salt of 2-ethoxypentacarboxylic acid, and partially sodiumize fatty acids; or alkoxylated hydroxy fatty acids 醯Compounds in which chlorine reacts with amino groups of amino acids such as sarcosinic acid or glycine to make the carboxylic acid in the amino acid portion sodium; or compounds obtained by reacting fatty ammonium chloride with the amino group of arginine Wait. Examples of the anionic surfactant whose hydrophilic group is a carboxylic acid or a salt thereof include the following anionic surfactants. [Chemical 5]Regarding the content of the anionic surfactant ((C) component) in the fiber treatment agent represented by the general formula (1) described above, from the viewpoint of increasing the change in hydrophilicity caused by the heat treatment, it is relative to the fiber treatment The total mass of the agent is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. From the viewpoint that if the hydrophilicity becomes too high, it becomes easy to maintain the liquid and the drying property is impaired, the fiber is The total mass of the treatment agent is preferably 20% by mass or less, and more preferably 13% by mass or less. The content of the anionic surfactant ((C) component) represented by the general formula (1) is preferably 1% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or more and 13% by mass or less. [Polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester (component (C))] Polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid, which is one of the essential components of the fiber treating agent contained in the first fiber layer 11 Esters are formulated in fiber treatment agents to reduce the hydrophilicity caused by heat treatment during the manufacture of nonwoven fabrics, that is, to significantly reduce the hydrophilicity of a desired portion of the nonwoven fabric, and are nonionic interfaces. One of the active agents. Polyoxyalkylene modified polyol fatty acid ester is one of polyol fatty acid esters obtained by esterifying hydroxyl groups of polyols with fatty acids, and is obtained by adding an alkylene oxide to the polyol fatty acid ester. Modified material. The polyoxyalkylene-modified polyhydric alcohol fatty acid ester can be produced in accordance with a conventional method, for example, in accordance with Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-91852. Examples of the polyol as one of the raw materials of the polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester (or polyol fatty acid ester) include ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, and polyethylene glycol (molecular weight 200) ～ 11000), propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, polypropylene glycol (molecular weight 250-4000), 1,3-butanediol, glycerin, polyglycerin (polymerization degree 2-30), erythritol, xylitol, sorbitol , Mannitol, inositol, sorbitol, sorbate, sucrose, trehalose, irose, lactosucrose, cyclodextrin, maltitol, lactitol, isomalt, panitol ), Reducing sugar, etc. Preferred are polyethylene glycol, glycerol, erythritol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbate, and sucrose, and particularly preferred are sorbitol, sorbitol, and sorbate. Regarding the other fatty acid as a raw material of the polyoxyalkylene-modified polyhydric alcohol fatty acid ester (or polyhydric alcohol fatty acid ester), for example, saturated or unsaturated fatty acids having 6 to 22 carbon atoms may be mentioned. Ingredients are mixed fatty acids or branched fatty acids with 8 to 36 carbon atoms. Fatty acids may also contain hydroxyl groups locally. Specific examples include octanoic acid, nonanoic acid, capric acid, undecanoic acid, dodecanoic acid, tetradecanoic acid, hexadecanoic acid, octadecanoic acid, and cis-9-octadecenoic acid. , Eicosanoic acid, behenic acid, behenic acid, hexacosanoic acid, octacosanoic acid, 2-ethylhexyl acid, isostearic acid, etc. can also be used as natural origin The mixed fatty acids of coconut oil fatty acid and tallow fatty acid are preferably fatty acids having 8 to 18 carbon atoms, and particularly preferred are dodecanoic acid, octadecanoic acid, and cis-9-octadecenoic acid. Regarding the main component of the polyhydric alcohol fatty acid ester constituting the polyoxyalkylene-modified polyhydric alcohol fatty acid ester, when the hydrophobic chain is increased to improve the hydrophobicity, the molecular shape is made three-dimensionally larger rather than linear. From the viewpoint that the ground becomes large and is easily introduced into the fiber, an esterified product of a ternary or higher alcohol and an esterified rate of the alcohol component is preferably 90% or higher. Here, it is preferable that the main component is a component of the most polyol fatty acid ester, and contains 50% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the polyol fatty acid ester. Examples of the trihydric alcohol include glycerin, the tetrahydric alcohol includes erythritol, and the pentavalent alcohol includes xylitol. As the polyol fatty acid ester constituting the polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester, castor oil (hydrogenated castor oil) is particularly preferred. Castor oil is a glycerin fatty acid ester that uses the seed of castor, which is a plant of the Euphorbia family, as a supply source, and about 90% of the fatty acid is ricinoleic acid. That is, as the polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester, an ester oil of glycerin and a fatty acid mainly containing ricinolic acid is preferred. Among polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid esters, examples of the alkylene oxide added to the polyol fatty acid ester include ethylene oxide, propylene oxide, and butylene oxide. Polyoxyalkylene modified polyol fatty acid esters are particularly preferred. Polyoxyethylene (POE) modified polyol fatty acid esters in which alkylene oxide is ethylene oxide added to the polyol fatty acid ester, especially The preferred is POE modified castor oil (POE modified hydrogenated castor oil) in which the polyol fatty acid ester is castor oil (hydrogenated castor oil). In polyoxyalkylene-modified polyhydric alcohol fatty acid esters, regarding the addition mole number of alkylene oxide to polyhydric alcohol fatty acid esters, the liquid absorption performance of the laminated nonwoven fabric (the first fiber layer) is improved (liquid From the viewpoint of reduction of the residual amount or the amount of liquid flow, etc., it is preferably more than 20 mol, and more preferably 40 mol or more. However, if the addition mole number of the alkylene oxide is too large, the hydrophilicity of the laminated nonwoven fabric becomes too high. For example, when the laminated nonwoven fabric is used as a surface sheet in an absorbent article, it may cause a residual amount of liquid. There is a concern that the number of added moles is preferably 80 mol or less, and more preferably 60 mol or less. Regarding the content of the polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester ((C) component) in the fiber treatment agent, the hydrophilicity of the surface sheet 1 (the first fiber layer 11) was improved, and the nonwoven fabric was significantly exhibited. From the viewpoint of the effect of reducing the hydrophilicity caused by heat treatment at the time of production, it is preferably 5 mass% or more, more preferably 10 mass% or more with respect to the total mass of the fiber treatment agent, and furthermore, it is suppressed due to strong hydrophilicity. From the viewpoint of an increase in the amount of liquid residue due to chemical conversion, it is preferably 20% by mass or less, and more preferably 15% by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the fiber treatment agent. In addition, the "fiber treatment agent" serving as a reference for the content of the component contained in the fiber treatment agent of components (A) to (C) is a "fiber treatment agent attached to a nonwoven fabric" unless otherwise specified, and is not attached to a nonwoven fabric. Previous fiber treatment agent. When the fiber treatment agent is attached to the nonwoven fabric, the fiber treatment agent is usually diluted with an appropriate solvent such as water. Therefore, the content of the fiber treatment agent, such as the content of the component (A) in the fiber treatment agent, may be used. The total mass of the diluted fiber treatment agent is used as a reference. In addition, in the case where the fibrous treatment agent is attached to the non-woven fabric of the surface sheet 1, for example, when the attached fibrous treatment agent is analyzed, the analysis is preferably performed in the following order. First, the non-woven fabric to be analyzed is washed with an appropriate solvent. Examples of the cleaning solvent include a mixed solvent of ethanol and methanol, and a mixed solvent of ethanol and water. When the non-woven fabric to be analyzed is a surface sheet of an absorbent article such as a menstrual article or a disposable diaper for children or adults, a heating mechanism such as a dryer is used for the surface sheet and the absorbent article. After the adhesive for joining other members is heated to melt and soften, the surface sheet is peeled off, and the peeled surface sheet is washed with a cleaning solvent. Next, the total amount of the fiber treatment agent attached to the non-woven fabric can be measured by drying the solvent (the solvent for cleaning containing the fiber treatment agent) used for cleaning the non-woven fabric and analyzing the residue. In addition, an appropriate column and a solvent were selected for the residue according to its composition, and then each component was divided by high performance liquid chromatography, and then each portion was subjected to MS (Mass Spectrometry) measurement and NMR ( Nuclear Magnetic Resource (nuclear magnetic resonance) measurement, elemental analysis, etc., so that the structure of each part can be identified. When the fiber treatment agent contains a polymer compound, it is easier to identify the constituents by using a method such as gel permeation chromatography (GPC) in combination. In the fiber treating agent contained in the first fiber layer 11, the content ratio of the polyorganosiloxane of the component (A) and the anionic surfactant represented by the general formula (1) of the component (C) (the former: The latter) is preferably 1: 3 to 4: 1 in terms of mass ratio, and more preferably 1: 2 to 3: 1. In the fiber treatment agent contained in the first fiber layer 11, the content ratio of the polyorganosiloxane of component (A) and the polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester of component (C) (the former : The latter) is preferably 1: 2 to 3: 1 in terms of mass ratio, and more preferably 1: 1 to 2: 1. In the fiber treatment agent contained in the first fiber layer 11, the content ratio (the former: the latter) of the polyorganosiloxane of the component (A) and the alkyl phosphate of the component (B) is better in terms of mass ratio. It is 1: 5 to 10: 1, and more preferably 1: 2 to 3: 1. [Other Components] The fiber treatment agent contained in the first fiber layer 11 may contain other components in addition to the components (A) to (C) described above. Examples of the components to be blended in addition to the components (A) to (C) include processing agents such as anti-gelling agents such as modified polysiloxane. In addition, as the other components, anionic, cationic, amphoteric, and nonionic surfactants (other surfactants than the (B) component and the (C) component) can be used. The heat-fusible fibers contained in the first fiber layer 11 can have a higher surface hydrophilicity than that before the fiber treatment agent is adhered. From the viewpoint of improving the hydrophilicity of the fiber, the ratio of the adhesion amount of the fiber treatment agent to the total mass of the heat-fusible fibers other than the fiber treatment agent is preferably 0. 1 mass% or more, more preferably 0. 2% by mass or more, and 1. 5 mass% or less, more preferably 1. 0 mass% or less. The amount of the fiber treatment agent (fiber treatment agent adhesion rate) adhered to the fibers can be measured by the following method. First, use an electronic balance to accurately weigh 1 kg of fiber to the third decimal place (W1). Next, the fibers were washed with room temperature water for 20 minutes, and then washed with water at 50 ° C for 2 minutes. After repeating the washing with the water 3 times, it was immersed in ethanol and washed with a 40 KHz ultrasonic wave. The ultrasonic washing was performed for 30 minutes, and the operation was repeated 3 times. After washing, the fibers were left to dry for 1 day, and the weight (W2) was measured. The fiber treatment agent adhesion rate was calculated by the following formula. Fiber treatment agent adhesion rate (% by mass) = {(W1-W2) / W1} × 100 As a method for attaching the fiber treatment agent to the surface of the heat-fusible fiber, various known methods can be adopted without particular limitation. Examples include coating by a sprayer, coating by a slit coater, coating by a roll transfer, and immersion of a fiber treatment agent. These treatments may be performed on the fibers before the fiber web is formed, or may be performed after the fibers are web-formed by various methods. However, it is necessary to perform the treatment before the hydrophilicity reducing step described later. The fiber on which the fiber treatment agent is adhered on the surface is dried at a temperature sufficiently lower than the melting point of the polyethylene resin (for example, 110 ° C. or lower) by a hot-air blower dryer. [Fiber treatment agent contained in the second fiber layer 12] As described above, the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 is higher than that of any portion of the first fiber layer 11, and the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 is arbitrary. One part is the same. As the fiber treatment agent contained in the second fiber layer 12, a fiber treatment agent called an oil agent that was previously used to impart hydrophilicity to the fibers can be used, such as anionic, cationic, amphoteric, and nonionic. Various molecular weights of the surfactant are used alone or in combination of two or more. The constituent fibers of the second fiber layer 12 are preferably not treated with a specific fiber treatment agent containing the components (A) to (C). Examples of the anionic surfactant include sodium alkyl phosphate, sodium alkyl ether phosphate, sodium dialkyl phosphate, sodium dialkyl succinate, and alkyl benzenesulfonate. Base sodium salt, sodium sulfonate sodium salt, sodium alkyl sulfate sodium salt, sodium second alkyl sulfate sodium salt, etc. (Any alkyl group is preferably 6 or more and 22 or less, and more preferably 8 or more and 22 or less). These can also use other alkali metal salts such as potassium salts instead of sodium salts. Examples of the cationic surfactant include an alkyl (or alkenyl) trimethyl ammonium halide, a dialkyl (or alkenyl) dimethyl ammonium halide, and an alkyl (or alkenyl) pyridinium halide. These compounds are preferably those having an alkyl or alkenyl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms. Examples of the halogen in the halide compound include chlorine and bromine. Examples of the amphoteric surfactant include alkyl (1 to 30 carbon atoms) dimethyl betaine, alkyl (1 to 30 carbon atoms) amidoalkyl (1 to 4 carbon atoms) dimethyl beet Betaine-type amphoteric surfactants such as alkali, alkyl (carbon number 1-30), dihydroxyalkyl (carbon number 1-30), betaine, sulfobetaine-type amphoteric surfactant, or alanine-type [alkyl (Carbon number 1-30) amino propionic acid type, alkyl (carbon number 1-30) imine dipropionic acid type, etc.] amphoteric surfactant, glycine type such as alkyl betaine [alkyl (carbon Numbers 1 to 30) Aminoacetic acid type, etc.] Amphoteric type amphoteric surfactants such as amphoteric surfactants; Aminosulfonic acid type amphoteric surfactants such as alkyl (carbon number 1 to 30) taurine type. Examples of nonionic surfactants include glycerin fatty acid esters, poly (preferably n = 2 to 10) glycerin fatty acid esters, and polyhydric alcohol fatty acid esters such as sorbitan fatty acid esters (all of which are preferably Carbon number of fatty acid 8 to 60), alkylene oxide adduct of the above-mentioned polyhydric alcohol fatty acid ester (preferably 2 to 60 mol), polyoxyalkylene (addition mol 2) ～ 60) alkyl (8-22 carbons) ammonium, polyoxyalkylene (additional mole number 2-60) alkyl (8-22 carbons) ether, polyoxyalkylene modified polysilicon Oxygen, amine-modified polysiloxane, etc. The fiber treating agent contained in the second fiber layer 12 is particularly preferably a nonionic surfactant. If a large amount of a nonionic surfactant is blended in the second fiber layer 12, the effects of improving the adhesion stability of the fiber surface and suppressing the reduction in function due to a pseudo-bonding between the molecules of the surfactant can be obtained. In particular, higher molecular weight nonionic surfactants are better in terms of obtaining hydrophilic durability. In addition, as a method for easily fixing the fiber treatment agent to the surface of the fiber, a method such as using a fixing agent or kneading in addition to the surfactant is also preferable in terms of improving hydrophilic durability. To the fiber treatment agent contained in the second fiber layer 12, a treatment agent such as an anti-gelling agent such as modified polysiloxane may be added. In the second fiber layer 12, the amount of adhesion of the fiber treatment agent to the fibers, or the method of adhesion, may be the same as the treatment with the fiber treatment agent for the heat-fusible fibers contained in the first fiber layer 11. [Manufacturing method of the surface sheet 1] The surface sheet 1 for an absorbent article is a laminated non-woven fabric, and more specifically includes a fiber treatment including a fiber containing the components (A), (B), and (C). The first fibrous layer 11 of the heat-fusible fibers of the agent and the laminated non-woven fabric laminated on the one side of the first fibrous layer 11 and the second fibrous layer 12. The manufacturing method of the surface sheet 1 includes the steps of locally joining the first fiber layer 11 and the second fiber layer 12 to form a laminate; and a step of reducing hydrophilicity, which is based on the thermal fusion properties of the first fiber layer 11 The heat treatment at a temperature above the melting point of the fibers decreases the hydrophilicity of the first fiber layer 11. FIG. 12 shows a manufacturing apparatus which is well used for manufacturing the surface sheet 1. The manufacturing apparatus 100 shown in the figure includes a first fiber web manufacturing unit 110, a second fiber web manufacturing unit 120, a first heating unit 130, an embossing unit 140, and a second heating unit 150. Each of the first fiber web manufacturing unit 110 and the second fiber web manufacturing unit 120 includes a card and performs a cotton scavenging step. The first fiber web manufacturing unit 110 is a part for manufacturing a fiber web corresponding to the first fiber layer 11 of the target laminated nonwoven fabric (hot air nonwoven fabric). On the other hand, the second fiber web manufacturing unit 120 manufactures a portion of the fiber web corresponding to the second fiber layer 12 of the target surface sheet 1. Appropriate raw fiber is supplied to the first fiber web manufacturing unit 110 and the second fiber web manufacturing unit 120 according to the specific use of the target surface sheet, and the first fiber web 111 and the second fiber web 121 are manufactured. Corresponding to the specific application of the target laminated nonwoven fabric, an appropriate amount of a fiber treating agent is attached to the raw fiber. The first fiber web 111 successively sent from the first fiber web manufacturing section 110 in the direction indicated by MD in the figure is conveyed to the first heating section 130 for the step of reducing the hydrophilicity. In the step of reducing the hydrophilicity, the first fiber web 111 is subjected to a hot air blowing treatment by the first heating unit 130, so that the fibers constituting the first fiber web 111 are thermally fused with each other to become the first nonwoven fabric 112. The first heating unit 130 includes a sealed chamber 131. A circular endless belt (not shown) is arranged in the chamber 131. The endless belt in the cavity 131 is a breathable material, for example, a mesh belt made of metal wire or resin is included. The first fiber web 111 is carried by being placed on an endless belt in the chamber 131. Here, the surface of the first fiber web 111 facing the endless belt in the chamber 131 is referred to as a first surface 1S, and the surface on the opposite side of the first surface 111a is referred to as a second surface 2S. In the chamber 131, an air outlet (not shown) heated to a temperature higher than the melting point of the heat-fusible fibers constituting the first fiber web 111 (hereinafter also referred to as "hot air") is provided. Furthermore, a suction port (not shown) for the hot air that is blown out is also provided in the chamber 131. While the first fiber web 111 conveyed into the chamber 131 passes through the chamber 131, the hot air HW blows the first fiber web 111 in a hot air manner. The blowing of the hot air HW is performed from the second surface 2S side of the first fiber web 111. The blown hot air HW is released from the first surface 1S side of the first fiber web 111. In order to achieve this, the above-mentioned air outlet (not shown) is arranged so as to face the second surface 2S of the first fiber web 111, and the above-mentioned suction port (not shown) is opposed to the first surface 1S. Way configuration. As described above, in the heat-fusible fibers to which the fiber-treating agent containing the components (A) to (C) is attached, the degree of penetration of the fiber-treating agent into the fiber varies according to the heat amount of the heat-fusible fibers. As the heat becomes larger, the degree of penetration of the fiber treatment agent into the fiber becomes larger. In addition, the greater the degree of penetration of the fiber treatment agent, the lower the hydrophilicity of the fiber as compared with the initial state where the fiber treatment agent was attached. In the manufacturing method of this embodiment, by using this phenomenon, the target laminated nonwoven fabric (equivalent to the first nonwoven fabric of the first fiber layer) has a gradient of hydrophilicity, and the hydrophilicity can be obtained from the second surface side toward the first The surface side becomes taller with a surface sheet having a gradient. In detail, according to the hot air method, the fibers existing on the hot air blowing surface of the first fiber web 111, that is, the second surface 2S, receive the largest amount of heat, and exist on the opposite side of the hot air blowing surface, that is, the above-mentioned ring shape in the chamber 131. The fibers on the opposite side of the belt, that is, 1S on the first side, receive the least amount of heat. Therefore, in the first heating section 130 of the present manufacturing method, the fibers existing on the surface of the second surface 2S of the first fiber web 111 receive the largest amount of heat, and the fibers existing on the surface of the first surface 1S receive the smallest amount of heat. As a result, of the first nonwoven fabric 112 obtained by subjecting the first fiber web 111 to a hot-air blowing treatment, the fiber treatment agent on the second surface 2S side receiving the maximum heat has the largest degree of penetration, and the first receiving the minimum heat The degree of penetration of the fiber treatment agent on the surface 1S side is the smallest. From the 1S side of the first surface to the second surface 2S side, the degree of penetration of the fiber treatment agent into the fiber becomes larger. Therefore, in the first nonwoven fabric 112, the first surface 1S side becomes a high hydrophilic part HP with relatively high hydrophilicity, and the second surface 2S side becomes a low hydrophilic part LP with relatively low hydrophilicity. The first nonwoven fabric 112 is further laminated with the second fiber web 121 as described later, and is subjected to an embossing step in the embossed portion 140 and then subjected to a heat shrinking step in the second heating portion 150. In the second heating part 150, it is set such that the fibers existing on the surface of the first surface of the second fiber web 121 receive the maximum heat. In the first nonwoven fabric 112, the fibers existing in the low hydrophilic part LP are more present. The fibers in the highly hydrophilic part HP receive more heat. Therefore, the first nonwoven fabric 112 after the heat shrinking step has a larger hydrophilicity gradient than the first nonwoven fabric 112 immediately after the hydrophilicity reducing step. In the step of reducing the hydrophilicity, regarding the heat treatment temperature, the viewpoint that a gradient of hydrophilicity is generated in the first web 111 or the first nonwoven fabric 112, and the heat-fusible fibers constituting the first web 111 are fused to ensure the first nonwoven fabric. From the viewpoint of the strength of 112, it is preferably 127 ° C or higher, more preferably 133 ° C or higher, and even more preferably 136 ° C or higher. From the viewpoint of the texture of the first nonwoven fabric 112, it is preferably 145 ° C or lower. The temperature is more preferably 140 ° C or lower, and even more preferably 138 ° C or lower. From the same viewpoint, the heat treatment time at the above temperature is preferably 3 seconds or more, more preferably 5 seconds or more, still more preferably 7 seconds or more, and preferably 14 seconds or less, and more preferably 12 seconds. Seconds or less, more preferably 10 seconds or less. The second fiber web 121 successively sent from the second fiber web manufacturing section 120 in the direction indicated by MD in the figure overlaps the first nonwoven fabric 112 and is provided in the embossing section 140 for the embossing step. In the embossing step, the first nonwoven fabric 112 and the second fiber web 121 are locally joined to form a laminated body 101A. Similarly to the first fiber web 111 and the first nonwoven fabric 112, the second fiber web 121 has a first surface 1S facing the belt for conveying these and a second surface 2S located on the opposite side to the first surface 1S. The first nonwoven fabric 112 is arranged on the second fiber web 121 so that the second surface 2S of the second fiber web 121 and the low hydrophilic part LP of the first nonwoven fabric 112 face each other. The embossed portion 140 may include, for example, an uneven roll 141 and an anvil roll 142. The convex portion of the concave-convex roller 141 corresponds to the shape of the welded portion 6 having the intermediate joint portion 61 and the other joint portions 62 described above. The embossing processing conditions of the embossed portion 140 may be conditions under which the constituent fibers of the first nonwoven fabric 112 and the second fiber web 121 are pressurized under heating to form the welded portion 6 (see FIG. 3) by embossing fusion. In addition, the second fiber web 121 may be formed as a non-woven fabric before overlapping the first non-woven fabric 112. That is, the second nonwoven fabric 122 may be superimposed on the first nonwoven fabric 112 instead of the second fiber web 121 to be subjected to the embossing step. The laminated body 101A formed by partially joining and integrating the first nonwoven fabric 112 and the second fiber web 121 in the embossed portion 140 is transported to the second heating portion 150 for the heat shrinking step. The second heating section 150 is similar to the first heating section 130 and has a closed chamber 151, an endless belt (not shown), and a hot air HW blowout port (not shown) disposed on the first surface 1S side of the laminated body 101A. (Shown), and a suction port (not shown) of the hot air HW disposed on the second surface 2S side. The hot air HW in the heat shrinking step is heated to a shrinking temperature of the latently shrinkable fibers constituting the second fiber web 121. As described above, by the heat treatment of the second heating portion 150, the spirally crimping of the potentially crimpable fibers constituting the second fiber web 121 is contracted. The laminated body 101A locally joins the first nonwoven fabric 112 and the second fiber web 121 at the welded portion 6. Therefore, the potential shrinkable fibers in the second fiber web 121 are thermally contracted, and the second fiber web 121 is heated. The contraction causes the portions other than the welded portion 6 of the first nonwoven fabric 112 to protrude toward the second surface 2S side. Thereby, the first nonwoven fabric 112 has a plurality of high convex portions 1b and low convex portions 1s protruding from the second fiber web 121 side toward the first nonwoven fabric 112 side. As shown in FIG. 4, the high convex portion 1 b is formed in a large polygonal region BT surrounded by the intermediate joint portion 61 and other joint portions 62, and the low convex portion 1 s is formed in a small polygon surrounded by the intermediate joint portion 61 and other joint portions 62. Within the area ST. Here, the hot air HW from the air outlet (not shown) disposed on the first surface side of the laminated body 101A constitutes the fibers of the low hydrophilic portion LP of the first nonwoven fabric 112 and the fibers of the high hydrophilic portion HP. Compared with the greater heat, the degree of penetration of the fiber treatment agent into the fiber is further increased, and the hydrophilicity of the fiber is further reduced. Therefore, when the high convex portion 1b is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction Z through the top 1bt, the hydrophilicity of the top 1bu of the high convex is higher than that of the bottom 1bd of the high convex, and the low convex 1s passes through it. When the top 1st method is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction Z, the hydrophilicity at the top of the low convex portion 1su is higher than the hydrophilicity at the bottom of the low convex portion 1sd. In addition, since the high convex portion 1b is formed in the large polygon area BT and the low convex portion 1s is formed in the small polygon area ST, the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b is lower than the top 1st of the convex portion 1s toward the second surface side. The fiber density of the top 1st of the low convex portion 1s is higher than the fiber density of the lowermost portion of the high convex portion 1b, and further higher than the fiber density of the top 1bt of the high convex portion 1b. Therefore, by the hot air HW from an air outlet (not shown) disposed on the first surface side of the laminated body 101A, the fibers constituting the low hydrophilic portion LP on the lowermost side of the high convex portion 1b and the low convex portion 1s are formed. Compared with the fiber of the high hydrophilic part HP on the top 1st side of the top, the degree of penetration of the fiber treatment agent into the fiber becomes larger, and the hydrophilicity of the fiber decreases. Therefore, the hydrophilicity of the top 1su of the low convex portion is higher than the hydrophilicity of the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion. In the second heating unit 150, in order to allow the potentially crimpable fibers to shrink in the flow direction of the manufacturing apparatus, that is, the MD direction, it is preferable to change the conveying speed of the laminated body 101A. Specifically, it is preferable that the conveyance speed of the web or the laminate in the heat shrinking step upstream, that is, in the cotton swelling step to the embossing step, be faster than the conveyance speed of the laminate 101A in the heat shrink step. The degree of shrinkage of the laminated body 101A can be controlled by appropriately adjusting such a difference in conveying speed. At the same time, a part of the heat-fusible fibers constituting the second fiber web 121 is thermally fused with each other, and the second fiber web 121 becomes the second nonwoven fabric 122 to manufacture the surface sheet 1. In addition, the second fiber web 121 is not laminated on the first fiber web 111, but is laminated on the first nonwoven fabric 112 and then subjected to a heat shrinking step. Thereby, compared with the case where the whole of the laminated body 101A includes a fiber web, the mutually fused fibers of the first non-woven fabric 112 become a moderate resistance, and the potentially crimpable fibers can shrink uniformly in the laminated body. In the heat-shrinking step, the heat treatment time is preferably 6 seconds or more, more preferably 8 seconds or more, and even more preferably 10 seconds from the viewpoint of sufficiently exhibiting the contraction and shrinkage of latent crimpable fibers. As mentioned above, from the viewpoint of the texture of the first nonwoven fabric 112 and the second nonwoven fabric 122, it is preferably 20 seconds or less, more preferably 17 seconds or less, and still more preferably 15 seconds or less. In the heat shrinking step, the heat treatment temperature when the latent crimpable fibers include polyethylene and polypropylene is preferably 98 ° C or higher, more preferably 102 ° C or higher, from the viewpoint of the shrinkage starting temperature. It is more preferably 105 ° C or higher, and from the viewpoint of the texture of the first nonwoven fabric 112 and the second nonwoven fabric 122, the temperature is preferably 145 ° C or lower, more preferably 140 ° C or lower, and even more preferably 138 ° C or lower. The hydrophilicity of the fibers constituting the second nonwoven fabric 122 is not changed by the hot air of the second heating section 150. Since the fiber treatment agent is adhered so that the hydrophilicity of the fibers constituting the second fiber web 121 becomes higher than that of the fibers constituting the first fiber web 111, it is possible to obtain the first nonwoven fabric 122 while maintaining the highest hydrophilicity. The laminated nonwoven fabric 102A having a gradient in hydrophilicity of the nonwoven fabric 112. As described above, the method of manufacturing the surface sheet 1 is to locally reduce the hydrophilicity of the heat-fusible fiber provided with the fiber treatment agent in the thickness direction of the nonwoven fabric by applying heat, thereby exhibiting a gradient of hydrophilicity. Therefore, according to the above method, the gradient of the hydrophilicity can be set without overlapping a plurality of nonwoven fabrics, and the gradient of the hydrophilicity can be set along the thickness direction of a single nonwoven fabric. The laminated non-woven fabric 102A manufactured as described above is basically the same as the above-mentioned surface sheet 1 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), and the first non-woven fabric 112 (the first fiber web 111) is equivalent to the first fiber layer 11 and the second The nonwoven fabric 122 (second fiber web 121) corresponds to the second fiber layer 12. The surface sheet 1 thus manufactured is formed such that the hydrophilicity of the top 1bu of the high convex portion is higher than the hydrophilicity of the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion, and the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 is higher than the hydrophilicity of the top 1bu of the high convex portion. In addition, the hydrophilicity of the top 1su of the low convex portion is higher than the hydrophilicity of the bottom 1sd of the low convex portion, and the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer 12 is higher than the hydrophilicity of the top 1su of the low convex portion. If such a surface sheet 1 is used for a sanitary napkin 10, the second fiber layer 12 is formed to have higher hydrophilicity than the top 1bu of the high convex portion and the top 1su of the low convex portion. Therefore, although the hydrophilicity faces from the top side The bottom side becomes lower, and the liquid can be smoothly transferred from the first fiber layer 11 to the second fiber layer 12. Furthermore, as described above, since the second fiber layer 12 becomes high density due to heat shrinkage, it is complementary to the hydrophilicity higher than that of the first fiber layer 11, and the liquid held by the first fiber layer 11 is introduced into the second fiber layer. 12 has excellent performance. Therefore, it is not easy for liquid to remain on the surface, and once the absorbed liquid is not easy to return to the surface, the use feeling is improved. As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated based on the preferable embodiment, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment. The surface sheet 1 can also replace the X direction in the figure with the longitudinal direction of the sanitary napkin 10 as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, and make the Y direction in the figure coincide with the transverse direction of the sanitary napkin 10 to make X in the figure The direction is consistent with the horizontal direction of the tampon 10, so that the Y direction in the figure is consistent with the vertical direction of the tampon 10. The surface sheet may be used instead of the surface sheet 1 in which the welding portion 6 in the form shown in FIG. 4 is formed, and the surface sheet 1 in which the welding portion 6 is formed in the state shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14. Each of the intermediate joint portions 61 of the surface sheet shown in FIG. 13 includes a V-shaped bidirectionally extending shape portion 61a, an inverted V-shaped bidirectionally extending shape portion 61a, and a rectangle that is independently disposed at the intermediate position among these. Like independent welding portion 61b. Each of the intermediate joint portions 61 of the surface sheet 1 shown in FIG. 14 includes a V-shaped bidirectionally extending shape portion 61a, an inverted V-shaped bidirectionally extending shape portion 61a, and a rectangular shape parallel to the Y direction connecting these portions. Shaped connection welding portion 61c. Regarding the surface sheet 1 shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14, the same constituent elements as those of the surface sheet 1 shown in FIG. 4 are denoted by the same reference numerals. The absorbent article using the surface sheet of the present invention may be other absorbent articles such as sanitary pads (vaginal pads), incontinence pads, disposable diapers, in addition to menstrual pads. Examples of the body fluid absorbed into the absorbent article include menstrual blood, vaginal discharge, soft stool, urine, saliva, and blood. About the said embodiment, the following surface sheet for absorbent articles is also disclosed. <1> A surface sheet for an absorbent article, which has a first fiber layer and a second fiber layer laminated thereon, and the first fiber layer is located on the skin abutting surface side of the wearer. The fiber layer has a plurality of high convex portions protruding from the second fiber layer side toward the first fiber layer side, and a plurality of low convex portions having a height lower than the high convex portion, and the high convex portions and the low convex portions When the inside is filled with the fibers constituting the first fiber layer, and the cross section of the high convex portion in the thickness direction is viewed through the top, the hydrophilicity of the top of the high convex portion on the top side of the first fiber layer is hydrophilic. The degree of hydrophilicity at the bottom of the high convex portion on the side of the second fiber layer in the first fiber layer is higher than that of the top of the high convex portion. <2> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to the above <1>, in which the top side of the first fiber layer in the first fiber layer is cross-sectioned when the low convex portion is viewed through the top in a thickness direction. The hydrophilicity at the top of the low convex portion is higher than the hydrophilicity at the bottom of the low convex portion on the second fiber layer side in the first fiber layer, and the hydrophilicity at the top of the low convex portion is higher than the hydrophilicity at the bottom of the high convex portion. The hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer is higher than that of the top of the low convex portion. <3> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to the above <2>, wherein the degree of hydrophilicity gradually decreases from the top of the high convex portion toward the bottom of the high convex portion, and the degree of hydrophilicity toward the above from the top of the low convex portion The bottom of the low convex portion gradually becomes lower. <4> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to the above <2> or <3>, wherein the fiber density at the top of the low convex portion is higher than the fiber density at the top of the high convex portion and lower than the second The fiber density of the fiber layer. <5> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the second fiber layer is a heat-shrinkable fiber layer containing heat-shrinkable heat-shrinkable fibers, and The surface sheet includes a plurality of welded portions obtained by fusing the first fiber layer and the second fiber layer, and the surface sheet has a plurality of large polygonal regions surrounded by the plurality of welded portions, and the welded portions constitute the large polygon. The apex portion of the area, the surface sheet has a plurality of small polygonal areas surrounded by a plurality of fused portions constituting the apex portion of the large polygonal area and having an area smaller than the large polygonal area, and the fused portion also constitutes the small polygonal area. The vertex portion is a large polygon configured by arranging the high convex portion in each of the large polygon areas, the low convex portion is disposed in each of the small polygon areas, and a plurality of the large polygon areas are arranged adjacent to each other in the first direction. The area line and the plurality of small polygon areas are arranged adjacent to each other along the first direction, and the small polygon area is configured to be aligned with the first direction. The second direction is alternately arranged. <6> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to the above <5>, wherein the high convex portion in the large polygonal region adjacent to each other and the low convex portion in the small polygonal region are connected to each other by connecting the convex portions. The connecting convex portions are arranged between the welding portions constituting the apex portion and extend continuously across the high convex portions and the low convex portions. The first fiber layer of the connecting convex portions extends from the second The fiber layer side protrudes below the low convex portion toward the first fiber layer side. <7> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to the above <6>, wherein the large polygonal region is formed in a hexagonal shape surrounded by the six welded portions, and the small polygonal region is formed by the four welded portions. When the quadratic shape surrounded by the squares is focused on the low convex portion in the quadrangular small polygon area, the four convex portions in the large polygonal area are adjacent to each other, and one of the low convex portions and The four convex portions are connected to each other by the connecting convex portion. <8> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein the first fiber layer has heat-fusible fibers to which a fiber treatment agent is attached, and the fiber treatment agent It contains the following (A) component, (B) component, and (C) component. (A) polyorganosiloxane (B) alkyl phosphate (C) an anionic surfactant or a polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol fatty acid ester represented by the following general formula (1) [Chem. 6](In the formula, Z represents a linear or branched alkyl chain having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, which may contain an ester group, a amine group, an amine group, a polyoxyalkylene group, an ether group, or a double bond, and R1 And R2 Each independently represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms which may contain an ester group, amidino group, polyoxyalkylene group, ether group, or double bond, and X represents -SO3 M, -OSO3 M or -COOM, where M represents H, Na, K, Mg, Ca, or ammonium) <9> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the above <1> to <8>, wherein There are no other layers between the first fiber layer and the second fiber layer. <10> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the items <5> to <9>, wherein the ratio of the area of the welding portion to the total area of the surface sheet is 5% or more and 30 % Or less, preferably 7% or more and 20% or less. <11> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to the above <7>, wherein the high convex portion is a convex portion having a planar shape and the low convex portion is a circular convex portion having a planar shape. <12> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the height of the apex in the thickness direction of the high convex portion is 1.0 mm or more and 7.0 mm or less, It is preferably 1.5 mm or more and 5.0 mm or less. <13> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the above <1> to <12>, wherein the raised angle of the high convex portion from the bottom surface is 70 ° or more and 90 ° or less, preferably It is 75 ° or more and 85 ° or less. <14> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <13>, wherein the height of the apex in the thickness direction of the low convex portion is 0.4 mm or more and 4.5 mm or less, It is preferably 0.8 mm or more and 2.5 mm or less. <15> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the above <1> to <14>, wherein the raised angle of the low convex portion from the bottom surface is preferably 25 ° or more and 70 ° or less, preferably It is 30 ° or more and 65 ° or less. <16> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the above <1> to <15>, wherein the fiber density at the apex of the thickness direction of the low convex portion is relative to the thickness direction of the high convex portion The fiber density ratio of the vertex is 1.2 times or more and 3.0 times or less, and preferably 1.5 times or more and 2.5 times or less. <17> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <16>, wherein the thickness of the first fiber layer is 0.5 mm or more and 3.0 mm or less. <18> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <17>, wherein the thickness of the second fiber layer is 0.5 mm or more and 2.0 mm or less. <19> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the above <1> to <18>, wherein the surface sheet has a basis weight of 20 g / m2 Above 200 g / m2 Below, preferably 50 g / m2 Above 100 g / m2 the following. <20> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <19>, wherein in the first fiber layer, a contact angle of water on top of the high convex portion is 65 ° The angle is more than 89 °, preferably 65 ° or more and 85 ° or less, and particularly preferably 73 ° or more and 75 ° or less. <21> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <20>, wherein in the first fiber layer, a contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion is 75 ° Above and below 90 °, preferably above 80 ° and below 88 °, particularly preferably above 85 ° and below 86 °. <22> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the above <1> to <21>, wherein the contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion and the contact angle of water at the top of the high convex portion The difference is 1 ° or more and 20 ° or less, preferably 5 ° or more and 18 ° or less, and particularly preferably 7 ° or more and 15 ° or less. <23> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the above <1> to <22>, wherein the contact angle of water on the top of the high convex portion is relative to the contact angle of water on the bottom of the high convex portion The ratio is 0.7 or more and 0.95 or less, preferably 0.75 or more and 0.85 or less, and particularly preferably 0.8 or more and 0.85 or less. <24> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <23>, in which the low convex portion is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction so as to pass through the low convex portion. At the time of observation, the top of the low convex portion on the top side of the first fiber layer is provided. In the first fiber layer, the contact angle of water at the top of the low convex portion is 65 ° or more and 89 ° or less, preferably 70 ° to 85 °, particularly preferably 73 ° to 75 °. <25> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <24>, wherein the low convex portion is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction so as to pass through the top portion of the low convex portion. At the time of observation, the bottom portion of the low convex portion on the second fiber layer side of the first fiber layer has a contact angle of water at the bottom of the low convex portion of the first fiber layer of 75 ° or more and 90 ° or less. It is preferably 80 ° or more and 88 ° or less, and particularly preferably 85 ° or more and 86 ° or less. <26> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <25>, in which the low convex portion is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction so as to pass through the top portion of the low convex portion. During observation, the top of the low convex portion on the top side of the first fiber layer and the bottom of the low convex portion on the second fiber layer side are included, and the contact angle of water at the bottom of the low convex portion and the top of the low convex portion are The difference in the contact angle of water is 1 ° or more and 20 ° or less, 5 ° or more and 18 ° or less, 7 ° or more and 15 ° or less. <27> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <26>, in which the low convex portion is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction so as to pass through the low convex portion. When observed, the top of the low convex portion on the top side of the first fiber layer and the bottom of the low convex portion on the second fiber layer side are provided. The contact angle of water on the top of the low convex portion is relative to the bottom of the low convex portion. The ratio of the contact angle of water is 0.7 or more and 0.95 or less, preferably 0.75 or more and 0.9 or less, and particularly preferably 0.80 or more and 0.85 or less. <28> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <27>, in which the low convex portion is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction so as to pass through the low convex portion. When observed, the top of the low convex portion on the top side of the first fiber layer has a difference between a contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion and a contact angle of water at the top of the low convex portion, which is 1 ° or more and 20 ° Hereinafter, it is preferably 5 ° or more and 18 ° or less, and particularly preferably 7 ° or more and 15 ° or less. <29> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the items <1> to <28>, wherein the low convex portion is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction so as to pass through the low convex portion. When observed, the top of the low convex portion on the top side of the first fiber layer, the ratio of the contact angle of the top of the low convex portion to the contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion is 0.7 or more and 0.9 or less, It is preferably 0.75 or more and 0.88 or less, and particularly preferably 0.8 or more and 0.85 or less. <30> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of the above <1> to <29>, wherein the contact angle of water of the second fiber layer is 50 ° or more and 70 ° or less, preferably It is 55 ° or more and 65 ° or less, and particularly preferably 57 ° or more and 60 ° or less. <31> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <30>, wherein the low convex portion is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction so as to pass through the top portion of the low convex portion. When observed, with the top of the low convex part on the top side of the first fiber layer, the contact angle of water of the second fiber layer is smaller than the contact angle of water in the top of the high convex part and the top of the low convex part. The ratio of the contact angle of the part is 0.65 or more and 0.95 or less, preferably 0.7 or more and 0.9 or less, and particularly preferably 0.75 or more and 0.85 or less. <32> The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to any one of <1> to <31>, wherein the low convex portion is cross-sectioned in the thickness direction so as to pass through the top portion of the low convex portion. When observed, with the top of the low convex portion on the top side of the first fiber layer, the contact angle of water of the second fiber layer is larger than the contact angle of water in the top of the high convex portion and the top of the low convex portion. The ratio of the contact angle of the part is 0.55 or more and 0.85 or less, preferably 0.6 or more and 0.8 or less, and particularly preferably 0.65 or more and 0.75 or less. <33> An absorbent article using the surface sheet according to any one of the above <1> to <32>, and further comprising an absorber on the second fiber layer side of the surface sheet. <34> The absorbent article according to the above <33>, wherein the absorbent article has a longitudinal direction corresponding to the front and back direction of the wearer and a transverse direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, and the surface sheet has a plurality of the plurality of A large polygonal region surrounded by a fusion portion, the fusion portion constituting a vertex portion of the large polygonal region, the surface sheet having a plurality of the fusion portions surrounded by a plurality of the fusion portions constituting a vertex portion of the large polygonal region and having an area smaller than the large polygonal area In the small polygon area, the welding portion also constitutes the vertex portion of the small polygon area. The large polygon lines and the small polygon lines respectively extend in the horizontal direction and are alternately arranged in the vertical direction. <35> The absorbent article according to the above <34>, wherein the distance between the adjacent small polygon regions in the small polygon row is shorter than the distance between the small polygon regions located closest to each other in the longitudinal direction. <36> The absorbent article according to the above <34> or <35>, wherein the absorbent article has a central portion in the longitudinal direction, is located at a front side portion closer to the front side of the wearer than the central portion, and is located at a position higher than the central portion. The central portion leans on the wearer's rear side and rear portion, and the compression grooves on the arc formed by integrally compressing the surface sheet and the absorbent body extend in the longitudinal direction and extend across the front portion and the rear portion. <37> The absorbent article according to any one of <33> to <36>, which is a menstrual tampon. [Examples] Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail with reference to examples. However, the scope of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. Unless otherwise specified, "%" means "mass%". [Example 1] (1) Concentric core-sheath composite fibers having a core of polyethylene terephthalate and a sheath of polyethylene, which are heat-fusible fibers constituting the first fiber layer 11 (first fiber web). The core-sheath mass ratio is core: sheath = 50: 50, fineness is 2.4 dtex, and fiber length is 51 mm. The heat-fusible fiber of the above (1) is immersed in a fiber treatment agent (oil agent) I having the following composition. After the impregnation, it was dried to obtain a heat-fusible core-sheath composite fiber to which a fiber treatment agent was attached. The amount of the oil agent attached to the fibers was 0.39% by mass. Composition of fiber treatment agent (oil agent) I. Polyorganosiloxane (the above (A) component, polysiloxane "KM-903" manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicones): 8.3% by mass, and polysiloxane "KM The composition of -903 "is as follows. 18% by mass of polydimethylsiloxane with a weight average molecular weight of about 500,000, 42% by mass of polydimethylsiloxane with a weight average molecular weight of about 20,000, 5% by mass of a dispersant, and 35% by mass of water. Alkyl ester potassium salt [component (B) above, manufactured by Kao Corporation, potassium hydroxide neutralizer of Gripper 4131]: 22.9% by mass ・ Sodium dialkyl sulfosuccinate [component (C) above, Kao Corporation, Pelex OT-P]: 9.2% by mass-Alkyl (stearyl) betaine [components other than (A) to (C) above, Kao Corporation, Amphitol 86B]: 13.8 mass % ・ Polyoxyethylene (additional mole number: 2) stearylamine [components other than the above (A) to (C), manufactured by Kawaken Fine Chemicals, Amisol SDE]: 27.5 mass% • Polyoxyethylene (POE ), Polyoxypropylene (POP) modified polysiloxane [components other than (A) to (C) above, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., X-22-4515]: 18.3% by mass (A ) The blending amount of the ingredients is the blending amount of only polysiloxane in the composition of the above "KM-903", not the blending amount of "KM-903" as a whole. In Example 1, the blending amount of the (A) component of the heat-fusible fiber adhered to the first fiber layer was 5.0%. Similarly, regarding the component (B) and the component (C), the blending amount of each component except the water and the like contained in the fiber treatment agent is 23.8% for the (B) component and 9.5% for the (C) component. (2) Potentially shrinkable fibers (heat-shrinkable fibers) constituting the second fiber layer 12 (second fiber web). These are side-by-side composite fibers made of polypropylene on one side and polyethylene on the other. The volume ratio is 50:50, the fineness is 2.3 dtex, and the fiber length is 51 mm. The melting point of the core resin + the thermal shrinkage rate at 10 ° C was 9.5%. The potentially crimpable fiber (2) is immersed in a known fiber treatment agent (oil agent). Production of Non-Woven Fabric Using the fibers obtained in (1) and (2), the surface sheet 1 shown in Figs. 3 and 4 was produced using the production apparatus 100 shown in Fig. 12. Specifically, first, in the step of reducing the hydrophilicity, hot air is blown from the second surface side to the first fiber web formed using the first fiber web manufacturing section to obtain a first nonwoven fabric (first fiber layer 11). Then, a first nonwoven fabric is arranged on a second fiber web formed using the second fiber web manufacturing section to obtain a laminate, and the laminate is subjected to embossing to locally join the first nonwoven fabric with the second fiber web. Next, in the heat shrinking step, hot air is blown from the first surface side (second fiber web side) of the laminated body, and the second fiber web is used as the second nonwoven fabric (second fiber layer) to obtain a laminated nonwoven fabric having an uneven shape. The shape of the convex portion of the concave-convex roller 141 used for the above embossing corresponds to the shape of the welded portion 6 of the surface sheet 1 having the intermediate joint portion 61 and the other joint portions 62. As shown in FIG. 4, in the obtained non-woven fabric, a row of large polygonal regions BTL and a plurality of small polygonal regions ST arranged adjacent to each other in the Y direction are arranged adjacent to each other in the Y direction. The small polygonal area rows STL are alternately arranged in the X direction. The welding portion 6 includes an intermediate joint portion 61 and other joint portions 62. The intermediate joint portion 61 has an X-shape having four protrusions, and the other joint portions 62 have a Y-shape having three protrusions. The combination of the welded portion 6 having an X-shaped intermediate joint portion 61 and a Y-shaped other joint portion 62 is a laminated layer that is embossed as described above to locally join the first nonwoven fabric and the second fiber web. The hot air of 110 ° C ± 10 ° C was passed for 5 to 10 seconds, and the heat-shrinkable fibers of the second fiber web were rolled up. The second fiber layer 12 is shrunk and the first fiber layer 11 is protruded in a convex shape to produce a surface sheet having a plurality of high-convex portions 1b and low-convex portions 1s having a three-dimensional dome structure. 6 welds / cm2 Configuration, the closest interval between the two welded parts 6 adjacent to each other in the Y direction after the heat shrinkage of the surface sheet is 1.1 mm, and the average area of the intermediate joint 61 is 2.3 mm2 , The average area of other joints 62 is 1.6 mm2 . The four protruding portions of the X-shaped intermediate joint portion 61 and the three protruding portions of the other Y-shaped joint portion 62 are the same 0.85 mm. The height hb of the high convex portion 31 is 2.3 mm, and the height hs of the low convex portion 32 is 1.5 mm. The intersection angle θ1 between the protrusions constituting the intermediate joint portion 61 is 90 °, and the intersection angle θ2 between the protrusions constituting the other joint portions 62 is 130 °. [Comparative Example 1] The shape of the convex portion of the uneven roll 141 used for the embossing and the fiber treatment agent (oil agent) attached to the heat-fusible fibers constituting the first fiber layer 11 (first fiber web) were changed Except for this, the surface sheet of Comparative Example 1 was obtained in the same manner as the surface sheet of Example 1. First, the welded portion is composed of only a circular-shaped welded portion. In the obtained surface sheet, a circular-shaped welded portion is uniformly arranged in the X direction and the Y direction. 7.1 pcs / cm in round shape2 Configuration, the closest interval between the two welded parts in the Y direction after the heat shrinkage of the surface sheet is 1.6 mm, and the average area of the round welded parts is 3.2 mm2 . On the surface sheet of Comparative Example 1, convex portions of a three-dimensional dome structure having a uniform height were arranged in the X direction and the Y direction. The height of the protrusion is 2.3 mm. In addition, as the first fiber layer 11 (first fiber web), a heat-fusible fiber immersed in a fiber treatment agent (oil agent) III was used. After the impregnation, it was dried to obtain a heat-fusible core-sheath composite fiber to which a fiber treatment agent was attached. The adhesion amount of the oil agent to the fibers was 0.39 mass%. The fiber treatment agent III is one in which the component (A) is removed from the fiber treatment agent I. [Comparative Example 2] A surface sheet of Comparative Example 1 was obtained in the same manner as the surface sheet of Example 1 except that the shape of the convex portion of the uneven roll 141 used for the embossing was changed. The welded portion is composed of only a circular-shaped welded portion, and in the obtained surface sheet, a circular-shaped welded portion is uniformly arranged in the X direction and the Y direction. 7.1 pcs / cm in round shape2 Configuration, the closest interval between the two welded parts in the Y direction after the heat shrinkage of the surface sheet is 1.6 mm, and the average area of the round welded parts is 3.2 mm2 . On the surface sheet of Comparative Example 1, convex portions of a three-dimensional dome structure having a uniform height were arranged in the X direction and the Y direction. The height of the protrusion is 2.3 mm. [Performance Evaluation] About each surface sheet of Example 1 and Comparative Examples 1 to 2, the contact angle of each part of the first fiber layer and the contact angle of the second fiber layer were measured by the above-mentioned method for measuring the contact angle. Specifically, regarding the surface sheet of Example 1, the contact angle of the top 1bu of the high convex portion, the contact angle of the bottom 1bd of the high convex portion, the contact angle of the top 1su of the low convex portion, the contact angle of the bottom 1sd of the low convex portion, And the contact angle of the second fiber layer 12. Regarding each surface sheet of Comparative Examples 1 to 2, the contact angle at the top of the convex portion, the contact angle at the bottom of the convex portion, and the contact angle of the second fiber layer 12 were measured. In addition, regarding each surface sheet of Example 1 and Comparative Examples 1 to 2, the amount of surface liquid return and the amount of surface liquid residue were evaluated according to the following methods. The evaluation environment was room temperature of 20 ° C and humidity of 60% RH. The results are shown in Table 1 below. [Measurement of Residual Liquid Absorption Capacity] Each surface sheet obtained in Example 1 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 was cut into a size of 60 mm (CD direction) × 80 mm (MD direction), and was passed through a hot-melt adhesive Each followed by an absorbent sheet of the same size (pulp 200 g / m2 And absorbent polymer 50 g / m2 ), A sample for evaluation was obtained. In addition, each surface sheet is arrange | positioned so that a 1st fiber layer side may face the skin contact surface side of a wearer. Secondly, 1.0 g of defibrillated horse blood whose viscosity was adjusted to 8 ± 0.1 cP in advance was added to the horizontal and smooth surface of the acrylic plate, and the sample was placed on the non-woven side (surface sheet) (Side) The method of contact with the defibrillated horse blood overlaps, and further, a heavy stone (acrylic plate) is superimposed on the sample, and 0.36 g / m is applied to the sample.2 The load. After 60 seconds after overlapping the heavy stones, the heavy stones and samples were removed, and the amount of defibrillated horse blood remaining on the surface of the acrylic plate was measured. The measurement of the amount of defibrillated horse blood remaining on the surface of the acrylic plate was performed using a commercially available toilet paper in the following manner. That is, the defibrated horse blood remaining on the surface of the acrylic plate is absorbed by using a tissue whose weight has been measured in advance, and the weight of the tissue after absorption is measured. The amount of defibrinated horse blood remaining on the surface of the acrylic board (mg) was determined by subtracting the weight of the sanitary paper before absorbing defibrinated horse blood from the weight of the sanitary paper after absorbing defibrinated horse blood. . The above operation was performed three times, and the average value of the three times was taken as the liquid suction residual amount. The liquid absorption residual amount is an indicator of the introduction property of the liquid. The smaller the liquid absorption residual amount is, the higher the liquid introduction property is, and the better the liquid absorption property can be evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1 below. The viscosity of defibrillated horse blood was adjusted by adjusting the blood cell and plasma ratio of defibrillated horse blood manufactured by Nippon Bio-test Laboratories Co., Ltd. The viscosity was measured using a B-type viscometer (manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.) TVB-10M, measurement conditions: Rotor No. 19, 30 rpm, 25 ° C, 60 seconds). [Evaluation of the amount of surface liquid return] Each surface sheet obtained in Example 1 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 was cut into a size of 60 mm (CD direction) × 80 mm (MD direction), and each of the surface sheets was cut through a hot-melt adhesive. Followed by the same size absorbent sheet (pulp 200 g / m2 And absorbent polymer 50 g / m2 ), A sample for evaluation was obtained. In addition, each surface sheet is arrange | positioned so that the 1st fiber layer side may face the skin contact surface side of a wearer. Next, the evaluation sample was placed horizontally, and an acrylic plate having a cylinder with an injection port having a diameter of 1 cm at the bottom was superimposed on the sample, and 3.0 g of each was injected from the injection port, and the viscosity was adjusted to 40 ± 0.1 cP in advance ( It is assumed that defibrillated horse blood with higher viscosity (menstrual blood, etc. visible in the first half of the menstrual period) is injected with a total of 6.0 g, and the state is maintained for 1 minute after the injection. The viscosity of defibrillated horse blood was adjusted in the same manner as in [Measurement of Residual Amount of Liquid Absorption]. Next, remove the acrylic plate with a cylinder, and place 16 sheets of 6 cm × 9.5 cm on the surface of the skin abutment surface of the top sheet, and the basis weight is 13 g / m.2 Absorbent paper (commercially available toilet paper). Further, a pressure of 4.0 × 10 was applied thereon.2 The Pa method places a weight and pressurizes for 5 seconds. After pressing, remove the absorbent paper and measure the weight of the paper before and after pressing. The defibrated horse blood absorbed by the paper is measured by subtracting the weight of the paper measured before pressing from the weight of the paper after pressing The weight is taken as the amount of liquid return on the surface. The above operation was performed three times, and the average value of the three times was taken as the liquid return amount (mg). The smaller the liquid return amount, the less likely the liquid return is to occur, and the higher the evaluation. The results are shown in Table 1 below. Similarly, 3.0 g of defibrillated horse blood was flowed in every 3 minutes, and the amount of liquid return (mg) was also measured under the condition of a total of 9.0 g. The results are shown in Table 1 below. [Table 1] From the results shown in Table 1, it can be seen that the sample using the surface sheet of Example 1 has the lowest amount of liquid return compared with the samples using the surface sheets of Comparative Examples 1 and 2, indicating that it is not easy to leave liquid on the sample surface. In addition, as compared with the sample using the surface sheet of Comparative Example 2, the sample using the surface sheet of Example 1 had a lower liquid absorption residual amount, indicating that the liquid had a higher introduction property. Therefore, the menstrual napkin using the surface sheet of Example 1 is not prone to residual liquid on the menstrual napkin surface, and once the absorbed liquid is not easy to return to the surface, the use feeling can be expected to be improved. [Industrial Applicability] According to the present invention, the contact area with the wearer's skin is further reduced, and liquid on the surface is not easy to remain. Once absorbed, the liquid is not easy to return to the surface, and the feeling of use is improved.

1‧‧‧表面片材 1‧‧‧ surface sheet

1b‧‧‧高凸部 1b‧‧‧High convex

1bd‧‧‧高凸部底部 1bd‧‧‧Bottom of High Convex

1bL‧‧‧高凸部行 1bL‧‧‧High Convex Row

1bt‧‧‧頂部 1bt‧‧‧Top

1bu‧‧‧高凸部頂部 1bu‧‧‧ Top of High Convex

1c‧‧‧連結凸部 1c‧‧‧Connecting convex part

1s‧‧‧低凸部 1s‧‧‧low convex

1sd‧‧‧低凸部底部 1sd‧‧‧Low convex part bottom

1sL‧‧‧低凸部行 1sL‧‧‧Low Convex Row

1st‧‧‧頂部 1st‧‧‧Top

1su‧‧‧低凸部頂部 1su‧‧‧Top of Low Convex

1S‧‧‧第1面 1S‧‧‧Part 1

2‧‧‧背面片材 2‧‧‧ back sheet

2S‧‧‧第2面 2S‧‧‧Part 2

3‧‧‧吸收體 3‧‧‧ Absorber

4‧‧‧側部片材 4‧‧‧ side sheet

5‧‧‧側翼部 5‧‧‧flank

5a‧‧‧固定部 5a‧‧‧Fixed section

6‧‧‧熔接部 6‧‧‧ Welding Department

10‧‧‧衛生棉 10‧‧‧ tampons

10s‧‧‧側部 10s‧‧‧side

11‧‧‧第1纖維層 11‧‧‧The first fiber layer

12‧‧‧第2纖維層 12‧‧‧ 2nd fiber layer

61‧‧‧中間接合部 61‧‧‧Intermediate joint

61a‧‧‧雙向延出形狀部 61a‧‧‧Two-way extension shape part

61b‧‧‧獨立熔接部 61b‧‧‧Independent welding department

61c‧‧‧連結熔接部 61c‧‧‧Connection Welding Department

61e‧‧‧突出部 61e‧‧‧ protrusion

62‧‧‧其他接合部 62‧‧‧Other joints

62e‧‧‧突出部 62e‧‧‧ protrusion

100‧‧‧製造裝置 100‧‧‧ manufacturing equipment

101A‧‧‧積層體 101A‧‧‧Laminated body

102A‧‧‧積層不織布 102A‧‧‧Laminated non-woven fabric

110‧‧‧第1纖維網製造部 110‧‧‧The first fiber web manufacturing department

111‧‧‧第1纖維網 111‧‧‧The first fiber web

112‧‧‧第1不織布 112‧‧‧The first non-woven fabric

120‧‧‧第2纖維網製造部 120‧‧‧The second fiber web manufacturing department

121‧‧‧第2纖維網 121‧‧‧The second fiber web

122‧‧‧第2不織布 122‧‧‧The second non-woven fabric

130‧‧‧第2加熱部 130‧‧‧ 2nd heating section

131‧‧‧腔室 131‧‧‧ chamber

140‧‧‧壓紋部 140‧‧‧Embossed Department

141‧‧‧凹凸輥 141‧‧‧convex roller

142‧‧‧砧輥 142‧‧‧Anvil roll

150‧‧‧第2加熱部 150‧‧‧ 2nd heating section

A‧‧‧中央部 A‧‧‧Central Department

B‧‧‧前方部 B‧‧‧Front

BT‧‧‧大多邊形區域 BT‧‧‧large polygon area

BTL‧‧‧大多邊形區域行 BTL‧‧‧ Large Polygon Region Line

C‧‧‧後方部 C‧‧‧Rear

CL‧‧‧中心線 CL‧‧‧ Centerline

hb‧‧‧高度 hb‧‧‧ height

hs‧‧‧高度 hs‧‧‧height

HP‧‧‧高親水性部 HP‧‧‧Highly hydrophilic

HW‧‧‧熱風 HW‧‧‧ Hot Air

LP‧‧‧低親水性部 LP‧‧‧Low hydrophilicity

Lx1‧‧‧假想二等分線 Lx1‧‧‧imaginary bisector

Lx2‧‧‧假想二等分線 Lx2‧‧‧imaginary bisector

Ly1‧‧‧假想二等分線 Ly1‧‧‧imaginary bisector

Ly2‧‧‧假想二等分線 Ly2‧‧‧imaginary bisector

MD‧‧‧方向 MD‧‧‧ Direction

R‧‧‧通液路徑 R‧‧‧ fluid path

ST‧‧‧小多邊形區域 ST‧‧‧Small polygon area

STL‧‧‧小多邊形區域行 STL‧‧‧Small polygon area row

X‧‧‧第2方向 X‧‧‧ 2nd direction

Y‧‧‧第1方向 Y‧‧‧ 1st direction

Z‧‧‧厚度方向 Z‧‧‧ thickness direction

θ1‧‧‧交叉角度 θ1‧‧‧ crossing angle

θ2‧‧‧交叉角度 θ2‧‧‧ crossing angle

θ3‧‧‧隆起角度 θ3‧‧‧ uplift angle

θ4‧‧‧隆起角度 θ4‧‧‧ uplift angle

圖1係自表面片材側觀察作為使用本發明之表面片材之吸收性物品的經期衛生棉之俯視圖。 圖2係模式性地表示圖1之II-II線剖面之剖視圖。 圖3係表示本發明之一實施形態之吸收性物品用之表面片材的立體圖。 圖4係表示圖3所示之表面片材上之熔接部之形狀及配置圖案的俯視圖。 圖5係將圖4所示之表面片材之一部分放大而表示之放大俯視圖。 圖6係模式性地表示圖5之VI-VI線剖面之剖視圖。 圖7係表示圖5所示之高凸部中之熔接部之形狀及配置圖案之放大俯視圖。 圖8係表示圖5所示之低凸部中之熔接部之形狀及配置圖案之放大俯視圖。 圖9係模式性地表示圖4所示之IX-IX線剖面之剖視圖。 圖10係模式性地表示圖4所示之X-X線剖面之剖視圖。 圖11係模式性地表示圖4所示之XI-XI線剖面之剖視圖。 圖12係表示良好地用於圖3所示之表面片材之製造方法之製造裝置的模式圖。 圖13係表示本發明之吸收性物品用之表面片材之另一例之熔接部之形狀及配置圖案的俯視圖。 圖14係表示本發明之吸收性物品用之表面片材之又一例之熔接部之形狀及配置圖案的俯視圖。FIG. 1 is a plan view of a menstrual napkin as an absorbent article using the surface sheet of the present invention as viewed from the surface sheet side. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a cross-section taken along the line II-II in FIG. 1. Fig. 3 is a perspective view showing a surface sheet for an absorbent article according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a shape and an arrangement pattern of a welding portion on the surface sheet shown in FIG. 3. FIG. 5 is an enlarged plan view showing a part of the surface sheet shown in FIG. 4 in an enlarged manner. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a cross section taken along the line VI-VI in FIG. 5. FIG. 7 is an enlarged plan view showing the shape and arrangement pattern of the welded portion in the high convex portion shown in FIG. 5. FIG. 8 is an enlarged plan view showing the shape and arrangement pattern of the welded portion in the low convex portion shown in FIG. 5. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a cross section taken along the line IX-IX shown in FIG. 4. Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a cross section taken along the line X-X shown in Fig. 4. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a cross section taken along the line XI-XI shown in FIG. 4. FIG. 12 is a schematic view showing a manufacturing apparatus that is favorably used in the method for manufacturing the surface sheet shown in FIG. 3. FIG. 13 is a plan view showing the shape and arrangement pattern of a welded portion of another example of the surface sheet for an absorbent article of the present invention. FIG. 14 is a plan view showing the shape and arrangement pattern of a welded portion of still another example of the surface sheet for an absorbent article of the present invention.

Claims (37)

一種吸收性物品用之表面片材，其係具有第1纖維層及積層於其之第2纖維層，且該第1纖維層位於穿著者之肌膚抵接面側者， 上述第1纖維層具有自上述第2纖維層側朝向該第1纖維層側突出之複數個高凸部、及高度低於該高凸部之複數個低凸部，該高凸部及該低凸部之內部被構成該第1纖維層之纖維填滿，且 對上述高凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之高凸部頂部之親水度高於該第1纖維層中之上述第2纖維層側之高凸部底部之親水度，且上述第2纖維層之親水度高於該高凸部頂部之親水度。A surface sheet for an absorbent article, comprising a first fiber layer and a second fiber layer laminated thereon, and the first fiber layer is located on a skin abutting surface side of a wearer, and the first fiber layer has A plurality of high convex portions protruding from the second fiber layer side toward the first fiber layer side and a plurality of low convex portions having a height lower than the high convex portion, and the insides of the high convex portion and the low convex portion are configured. When the fibers of the first fibrous layer are filled and the high convex portion is cross-sectionally viewed in the thickness direction through the top, the hydrophilicity of the top of the high convex portion on the top side of the first fiber layer is higher than In the first fiber layer, the hydrophilicity at the bottom of the high convex portion on the side of the second fiber layer, and the hydrophilicity of the second fiber layer is higher than that at the top of the high convex portion. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中對上述低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部之親水度高於該第1纖維層中之上述第2纖維層側之低凸部底部之親水度，該低凸部頂部之親水度高於上述高凸部底部之親水度，且上述第2纖維層之親水度高於該低凸部頂部之親水度。For example, if the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1 is a cross-sectional view of the low convex portion in the thickness direction by passing through the top, the top of the low convex portion on the top side of the first fiber layer is The hydrophilicity is higher than the hydrophilicity at the bottom of the low convex portion on the second fiber layer side in the first fiber layer, the hydrophilicity at the top of the low convex portion is higher than the hydrophilicity at the bottom of the high convex portion, and the second fiber The hydrophilicity of the layer is higher than that of the top of the low convex portion. 如請求項2之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中親水度自上述高凸部頂部朝向上述高凸部底部逐漸變低，且親水度自上述低凸部頂部朝向上述低凸部底部逐漸變低。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 2, wherein the hydrophilicity gradually decreases from the top of the high convex portion toward the bottom of the high convex portion, and the hydrophilicity gradually changes from the top of the low convex portion toward the bottom of the low convex portion. low. 如請求項2之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部頂部之纖維密度高於上述高凸部頂部之纖維密度，且低於上述第2纖維層之纖維密度。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 2, wherein the fiber density at the top of the low convex portion is higher than the fiber density at the top of the high convex portion and lower than the fiber density of the second fiber layer. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第2纖維層係含有經熱收縮之熱收縮性纖維之熱收縮纖維層， 上述表面片材具備複數個將上述第1纖維層與上述第2纖維層熔接所得之熔接部， 上述表面片材具有複數個由複數個上述熔接部所包圍之大多邊形區域，該熔接部構成該大多邊形區域之頂點部，且上述表面片材具有複數個由複數個構成該大多邊形區域之頂點部之該熔接部所包圍且面積小於該大多邊形區域的小多邊形區域，該熔接部亦構成該小多邊形區域之頂點部， 於各上述大多邊形區域內配置有上述高凸部，於各上述小多邊形區域內配置有上述低凸部，且 複數個上述大多邊形區域沿第1方向相互鄰接地配置而構成之大多邊形區域行與複數個上述小多邊形區域沿該第1方向相互鄰接地配置而構成之小多邊形區域行於與該第1方向正交之第2方向上交替地配置。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the second fiber layer is a heat-shrinkable fiber layer containing heat-shrinkable heat-shrinkable fibers, and the surface sheet includes a plurality of the first fiber layer and In the welded portion obtained by welding the second fiber layer, the surface sheet has a plurality of large polygonal regions surrounded by the plurality of welded portions, the welded portion constitutes a vertex portion of the large polygonal region, and the surface sheet has a plurality of A small polygonal area surrounded by a plurality of welding portions constituting a vertex portion of the large polygonal area and having an area smaller than that of the large polygonal area. The welding portion also constitutes a vertex portion of the small polygonal area in each of the large polygonal areas. A row of large polygonal regions and a plurality of small polygonal regions formed by disposing the high convex portions, the low convex portions within each of the small polygonal areas, and a plurality of the large polygonal areas arranged adjacent to each other in the first direction. The small polygonal areas arranged adjacent to each other along the first direction intersect in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. Configured. 如請求項5之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中相互鄰接之上述大多邊形區域內之上述高凸部與上述小多邊形區域內之上述低凸部係以連結凸部相連，該連結凸部配置於構成上述頂點部之上述熔接部彼此之間且跨及該高凸部與該低凸部而連續地延伸，且 上述連結凸部之上述第1纖維層自上述第2纖維層側朝向該第1纖維層側低於該低凸部地隆起。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 5, wherein the high convex portion in the large polygonal area adjacent to each other and the low convex portion in the small polygonal area are connected by a connecting convex portion, and the connecting convex portion The fused portions constituting the apex portion are continuously extended across the high convex portion and the low convex portion, and the first fiber layer of the connecting convex portion faces from the second fiber layer side toward the The first fiber layer side is raised below the low convex portion. 如請求項6之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述大多邊形區域形成為由6個上述熔接部所包圍之六邊形狀，上述小多邊形區域形成為由4個上述熔接部所包圍之四邊形狀，且 於著眼於1個四邊形狀之上述小多邊形區域內之上述低凸部時，4個六邊形狀之上述大多邊形區域內之上述高凸部鄰接，1個該低凸部與4個該高凸部以上述連結凸部相連。The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 6, wherein the large polygonal region is formed in a hexagonal shape surrounded by the six welding portions, and the small polygonal region is formed in a quadrangular shape surrounded by the four welding portions. Shape, and when focusing on the low convex portions in the quadrangular small polygonal area, the four convex portions in the large polygonal area adjoining the high convex portions, and one of the low convex portions and four The high convex portions are connected by the connecting convex portions. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第1纖維層具有附著有纖維處理劑之熱熔合性纖維，且上述纖維處理劑含有下述之(A)成分、(B)成分及(C)成分， (A)聚有機矽氧烷 (B)磷酸烷基酯 (C)下述之通式(1)所表示之陰離子界面活性劑、或聚氧伸烷基改性多元醇脂肪酸酯 [化1](式中，Z表示可含有酯基、醯胺基、胺基、聚氧伸烷基、醚基或雙鍵之碳數1～12之直鏈或支鏈烷基鏈，R1 及R2 分別獨立地表示可含有酯基、醯胺基、聚氧伸烷基、醚基或雙鍵之碳數2～16之直鏈或支鏈烷基，X表示-SO3 M、-OSO3 M或-COOM，M表示H、Na、K、Mg、Ca或銨)。The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the first fiber layer has heat-fusible fibers to which a fiber treatment agent is attached, and the fiber treatment agent contains the following (A) component and (B) component And (C) component, (A) polyorganosiloxane (B) alkyl phosphate (C) an anionic surfactant represented by the following general formula (1), or a polyoxyalkylene-modified polyol Fatty acid ester (Wherein, Z represents an ester group, acyl group of carbon number, amine, polyoxy alkylene, an ether group or a double bond of a linear or branched alkyl chain of 1 to 12, R & lt 1 and R 2 Each independently represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, which may contain an ester group, amidino group, polyoxyalkylene group, ether group or double bond, and X represents -SO 3 M, -OSO 3 M Or -COOM, M represents H, Na, K, Mg, Ca or ammonium). 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中於上述第1纖維層與上述第2纖維層之間不存在其他層。The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein there is no other layer between the first fiber layer and the second fiber layer. 如請求項5之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述熔接部之面積相對於上述表面片材總面積之比率為5%以上且30%以下，較佳為7%以上且20%以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 5, wherein the ratio of the area of the welding portion to the total area of the surface sheet is 5% or more and 30% or less, preferably 7% or more and 20% or less. 如請求項7之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述高凸部係平面形狀為橢圓之凸部，上述低凸部係平面形狀為圓形之凸部。The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 7, wherein the high convex portion is a convex portion whose plane shape is an ellipse, and the low convex portion is a convex portion whose plane shape is a circle. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述高凸部之厚度方向之頂點之高度為1.0 mm以上且7.0 mm以下，較佳為1.5 mm以上且5.0 mm以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the height of the apex in the thickness direction of the high convex portion is 1.0 mm or more and 7.0 mm or less, preferably 1.5 mm or more and 5.0 mm or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述高凸部之自底面之隆起角度為70°以上且90°以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the raised angle of the high convex portion from the bottom surface is 70 ° or more and 90 ° or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部之厚度方向之頂點之高度為0.4 mm以上且4.5 mm以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the height of the apex in the thickness direction of the low convex portion is 0.4 mm or more and 4.5 mm or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部之自底面之隆起角度為25°以上且70°以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the raised angle of the low convex portion from the bottom surface is 25 ° or more and 70 ° or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部之厚度方向之頂點之纖維密度相對於上述高凸部之厚度方向之頂點之纖維密度的比為1.2倍以上且3.0倍以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the ratio of the fiber density at the apex in the thickness direction of the low convex portion to the fiber density at the apex in the thickness direction of the high convex portion is 1.2 times or more and 3.0 times. the following. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第1纖維層之厚度為0.5 mm以上且3.0 mm以下。The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the thickness of the first fiber layer is 0.5 mm or more and 3.0 mm or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第2纖維層之厚度為0.5 mm以上且2.0 mm以下。The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the thickness of the second fiber layer is 0.5 mm or more and 2.0 mm or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述表面片材之基重為20 g/m2 以上且200 g/m2 以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the basis weight of the surface sheet is 20 g / m 2 or more and 200 g / m 2 or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中於上述第1纖維層中，上述高凸部頂部之水之接觸角為65°以上且89°以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein in the first fiber layer, the contact angle of water on the top of the high convex portion is 65 ° or more and 89 ° or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中於上述第1纖維層中，上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角為75°以上且90°以下。The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein in the first fiber layer, the contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion is 75 ° or more and 90 ° or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角與上述高凸部頂部之水之接觸角之差為1°以上且20°以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein a difference between a contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion and a contact angle of water at the top of the high convex portion is 1 ° or more and 20 ° or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中高凸部頂部之水之接觸角相對於上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角之比為0.7以上且0.95以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the ratio of the contact angle of water at the top of the high convex portion to the contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion is 0.7 or more and 0.95 or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，且 上述低凸部頂部之水之接觸角為65°以上且89°以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the low convex portion has the top side of the first fiber layer when the low convex portion is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction by passing through the top portion. The top of the low convex portion, and the contact angle of water at the top of the low convex portion is 65 ° or more and 89 ° or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之上述第2纖維層側之低凸部底部，且 上述低凸部底部之水之接觸角為75°以上且90°以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the low-convex portion has the second portion of the first fiber layer when the low-convex portion is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction through the top portion thereof. The bottom of the low convex portion on the fiber layer side, and the contact angle of water at the bottom of the low convex portion is 75 ° or more and 90 ° or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部及上述第2纖維層側之低凸部底部，且 上述低凸部底部之水之接觸角與上述低凸部頂部之水之接觸角之差為1°以上且20°以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the low convex portion has the top side of the first fiber layer when the low convex portion is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction by passing through the top portion. The top of the low convex portion and the bottom of the low convex portion on the second fiber layer side, and the difference between the contact angle of the water at the bottom of the low convex portion and the water at the top of the low convex portion is 1 ° or more and 20 ° or less . 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部及上述第2纖維層側之低凸部底部，且 上述低凸部頂部之水之接觸角相對於上述低凸部底部之水之接觸角之比為0.7以上且0.95以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the low convex portion has the top side of the first fiber layer when the low convex portion is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction by passing through the top portion. The top of the low convex portion and the bottom of the low convex portion on the second fiber layer side, and the ratio of the contact angle of water at the top of the low convex portion to the contact angle of water at the bottom of the low convex portion is 0.7 or more and 0.95 or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，且 上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角與上述低凸部頂部之水之接觸角之差為1°以上且20°以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the low convex portion has the top side of the first fiber layer when the low convex portion is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction by passing through the top portion. The difference between the contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion and the contact angle of water at the top of the low convex portion is 1 ° or more and 20 ° or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，且 上述低凸部頂部之接觸角相對於上述高凸部底部之水之接觸角之比為0.7以上且0.9以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the low convex portion has the top side of the first fiber layer when the low convex portion is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction by passing through the top portion. The top of the low convex portion, and the ratio of the contact angle of the top of the low convex portion to the contact angle of water at the bottom of the high convex portion is 0.7 or more and 0.9 or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述第2纖維層之水之接觸角為50°以上且70°以下。The surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the contact angle of the water of the second fiber layer is 50 ° or more and 70 ° or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，且 第2纖維層之水之接觸角相對於上述高凸部頂部及上述低凸部頂部中水之接觸角較小之部位之接觸角的比為0.65以上且0.95以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the low convex portion has the top side of the first fiber layer when the low convex portion is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction by passing through the top portion. The ratio of the contact angle of water on the top of the low convex portion and the second fiber layer to the contact angle of the portion where the contact angle of water in the top of the high convex portion and the top of the low convex portion is smaller is 0.65 or more and 0.95 or less. 如請求項1之吸收性物品用之表面片材，其中上述低凸部於對該低凸部以通過其頂部之方式於厚度方向進行剖面觀察時，具有上述第1纖維層中之該頂部側之低凸部頂部，且 第2纖維層之水之接觸角相對於上述高凸部頂部及上述低凸部頂部中水之接觸角較大之部位之接觸角的比為0.55以上且0.85以下。For example, the surface sheet for an absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the low convex portion has the top side of the first fiber layer when the low convex portion is viewed in cross section in the thickness direction by passing through the top portion. The ratio of the contact angle of water on the top of the low convex portion and the second fiber layer to the contact angle of the portion where the contact angle of water in the top of the high convex portion and the top of the low convex portion is larger is 0.55 or more and 0.85 or less. 一種吸收性物品，其使用如請求項1之表面片材，且於上述表面片材之第2纖維層側具備吸收體。An absorbent article using the surface sheet according to claim 1 and having an absorbent body on the second fiber layer side of the surface sheet. 如請求項33之吸收性物品，其中上述吸收性物品具有與穿著者之前後方向對應之縱向及與該縱向正交之橫向， 上述表面片材具有複數個由複數個上述熔接部所包圍之大多邊形區域，該熔接部構成該大多邊形區域之頂點部，且上述表面片材具有複數個由複數個構成該大多邊形區域之頂點部之該熔接部所包圍且面積小於該大多邊形區域的小多邊形區域，該熔接部亦構成該小多邊形區域之頂點部，且 上述大多邊形行及上述小多邊形行分別於該橫向上延伸，且於縱向上交替地排列。If the absorbent article of claim 33, wherein the absorbent article has a longitudinal direction corresponding to the front and back direction of the wearer and a transverse direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the surface sheet has a plurality of large areas surrounded by a plurality of the welding portions. A polygonal region, the welded portion constituting a vertex portion of the large polygonal region, and the surface sheet has a plurality of small polygons surrounded by the welded portion of the vertex portion of the large polygonal region and having an area smaller than the large polygonal region Area, the welding portion also constitutes the apex portion of the small polygon area, and the large polygon lines and the small polygon lines respectively extend in the horizontal direction and are alternately arranged in the vertical direction. 如請求項34之吸收性物品，其中上述小多邊形行中之相鄰之上述小多邊形區域間之距離短於位於縱向上最接近之位置之小多邊形區域間之距離。For example, the absorbent article of claim 34, wherein the distance between the adjacent small polygon regions in the small polygon row is shorter than the distance between the small polygon regions located closest in the longitudinal direction. 如請求項34之吸收性物品，其中上述吸收性物品於上述縱向上具備中央部、位於較該中央部靠穿著者之前側之前方部、及位於較該中央部靠穿著者之後側之後方部，將上述表面片材及上述吸收體一體地壓縮而成之弧上之壓縮槽於縱向上延伸而自上述前方部跨及上述後方部地延伸。The absorbent article according to claim 34, wherein the absorbent article has a central portion in the longitudinal direction, a front portion located on the front side of the wearer from the center portion, and a rear portion located on the back side of the wearer from the central portion. A compression groove on an arc formed by integrally compressing the surface sheet and the absorber extends in a longitudinal direction and extends from the front portion to the rear portion. 如請求項33之吸收性物品，其為經期衛生棉。If the absorbent article of claim 33 is a menstrual tampon.
TW106126840A 2016-08-09 2017-08-09 Surface sheet and absorbent article for absorbent articles TWI648041B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016156138A JP6271657B1 (en) 2016-08-09 2016-08-09 Top sheet for absorbent articles
JP??2016-156138 2016-08-09

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201811283A true TW201811283A (en) 2018-04-01
TWI648041B TWI648041B (en) 2019-01-21

Family

ID=61074726

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW106126840A TWI648041B (en) 2016-08-09 2017-08-09 Surface sheet and absorbent article for absorbent articles

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6271657B1 (en)
CN (1) CN108366891B (en)
TW (1) TWI648041B (en)
WO (1) WO2018030181A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7092628B2 (en) * 2018-09-18 2022-06-28 大王製紙株式会社 Absorbent articles and surface sheets
WO2020167883A1 (en) * 2019-02-13 2020-08-20 The Procter & Gamble Company Feminine hygiene pad with hydrophilic nonwoven topsheet having enhanced skin feel and obscuring performance
WO2020190627A1 (en) * 2019-03-18 2020-09-24 The Procter & Gamble Company Shaped nonwovens that exhibit high visual resolution
CN110403769A (en) * 2019-08-19 2019-11-05 福建安琪儿卫生用品有限公司 A kind of disposable absorbent article equipped with multiple lateral leakage protection three-dimensional shield
JP6998356B2 (en) * 2019-12-10 2022-02-10 花王株式会社 Absorbent article
JP7371316B2 (en) 2020-03-31 2023-10-31 大和紡績株式会社 Nonwoven fabric for absorbent articles and absorbent articles containing the same

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI509122B (en) * 2008-12-25 2015-11-21 Kao Corp Nonwoven and its manufacturing method
JP5421720B2 (en) * 2009-10-09 2014-02-19 ユニ・チャーム株式会社 Non-woven
JP5875157B2 (en) * 2012-09-28 2016-03-02 花王株式会社 Fiber sheet
JP5925835B2 (en) * 2013-09-24 2016-05-25 花王株式会社 Nonwoven manufacturing method
JP6310294B2 (en) * 2014-03-27 2018-04-11 花王株式会社 Top sheet for absorbent articles
JP5809341B1 (en) * 2014-09-29 2015-11-10 花王株式会社 Laminated nonwoven fabric and method for producing the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2018023473A (en) 2018-02-15
CN108366891A (en) 2018-08-03
CN108366891B (en) 2021-05-28
WO2018030181A1 (en) 2018-02-15
JP6271657B1 (en) 2018-01-31
TWI648041B (en) 2019-01-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW201811283A (en) Surface sheet for absorbent article
KR101840995B1 (en) Absorbent article
JP5631035B2 (en) Nonwoven sheet
KR101786474B1 (en) Absorbent article
JP5268662B2 (en) Absorbent article surface sheet
JP5809341B1 (en) Laminated nonwoven fabric and method for producing the same
TW201121521A (en) Absorbent article
JP3886400B2 (en) Top sheet for absorbent articles
JP2009185408A (en) Nonwoven fabric
JP6321505B2 (en) Uneven fabric
WO2014171388A1 (en) Nonwoven fabric and textile treating agent
TWI516578B (en) Non-woven and fiber treatment agent
JP5449056B2 (en) Absorbent article surface sheet
TWI651449B (en) Non-woven
JP6190263B2 (en) Nonwoven fabric and absorbent article
JP6408320B2 (en) Hydrophilic nonwoven fabric and fiber treatment agent for nonwoven fabric
CN107072831B (en) Absorbent article
JP6709068B2 (en) Absorbent article
JP2012090689A (en) Absorbent article
JP6940933B2 (en) Absorbent article
JP6632343B2 (en) Absorbent articles
JP3222477U (en) Fiber sheet for absorbent articles
JP2018023474A (en) Fiber sheet for absorbent article
JP6580435B2 (en) Absorbent articles
JP5640164B2 (en) Nonwoven fabric and fiber treatment agent